From: Harlan Stenn Date: Sun, 7 Jan 2024 08:46:19 +0000 (-0800) Subject: Makefile.am: X-Git-Tag: NTP_4_2_8P18_RC1~20^2^2 X-Git-Url: http://git.ipfire.org/cgi-bin/gitweb.cgi?a=commitdiff_plain;h=608f4c26b7d59c1cd70b528dcac66d1998d9b40e;p=thirdparty%2Fntp.git Makefile.am: Added util/lsf-times Many files: Update copyright year to 2024 bk: 659a64dbAcZW0TuDul-Z6DJt22F-6w --- diff --git a/ChangeLog b/ChangeLog index 25f5ad5a0..86fe3aa1e 100644 --- a/ChangeLog +++ b/ChangeLog @@ -41,9 +41,11 @@ is disabled. * [Bug 3825] Don't touch HTML files unless building inside a BK repo. Fix the script checkHtmlFileDates. +* Update the copyright year. * Update ntp.conf documentation to add "delrestrict" and correct information about KoD rate limiting. * html/clockopt.html cleanup. +* util/lsf-times - added. * Add DSA, DSA-SHA, and SHA to tests/libntp/digests.c. * Provide ntpd thread names to debugger on Windows. * Remove dead code libntp/numtohost.c and its unit tests. diff --git a/html/copyright.html b/html/copyright.html index d00cf9712..7584aefc3 100644 --- a/html/copyright.html +++ b/html/copyright.html @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@

Copyright Notice

jpg "Clone me," says Dolly sheepishly.

Last update: - 2-Mar-2023 05:21 + 7-Jan-2024 00:29 UTC


@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
 ***********************************************************************
 *                                                                     *
-* Copyright (c) Network Time Foundation 2011-2023                     *
+* Copyright (c) Network Time Foundation 2011-2024                     *
 *                                                                     *
 * All Rights Reserved                                                 *
 *                                                                     *
diff --git a/ntpd/invoke-ntp.conf.texi b/ntpd/invoke-ntp.conf.texi
index 89f85287c..04f0f4fde 100644
--- a/ntpd/invoke-ntp.conf.texi
+++ b/ntpd/invoke-ntp.conf.texi
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 #
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (invoke-ntp.conf.texi)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  September 30, 2023 at 03:20:45 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  January  7, 2024 at 12:34:25 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16
 # From the definitions    ntp.conf.def
 # and the template file   agtexi-file.tpl
 @end ignore
diff --git a/ntpd/invoke-ntp.keys.texi b/ntpd/invoke-ntp.keys.texi
index 3926518de..b57192707 100644
--- a/ntpd/invoke-ntp.keys.texi
+++ b/ntpd/invoke-ntp.keys.texi
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 #
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (invoke-ntp.keys.texi)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  June  6, 2023 at 04:37:41 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  January  7, 2024 at 12:34:27 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16
 # From the definitions    ntp.keys.def
 # and the template file   agtexi-file.tpl
 @end ignore
diff --git a/ntpd/invoke-ntpd.texi b/ntpd/invoke-ntpd.texi
index 471bca5b8..2788a8058 100644
--- a/ntpd/invoke-ntpd.texi
+++ b/ntpd/invoke-ntpd.texi
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 #
 # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (invoke-ntpd.texi)
 #
-# It has been AutoGen-ed  June  6, 2023 at 04:37:42 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16
+# It has been AutoGen-ed  January  7, 2024 at 12:34:29 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16
 # From the definitions    ntpd-opts.def
 # and the template file   agtexi-cmd.tpl
 @end ignore
diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.conf.5man b/ntpd/ntp.conf.5man
index edbbc4230..a9a3d5405 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntp.conf.5man
+++ b/ntpd/ntp.conf.5man
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
 .ds B-Font B
 .ds I-Font I
 .ds R-Font R
-.TH ntp.conf 5man "30 Sep 2023" "4.2.8p17" "File Formats"
+.TH ntp.conf 5man "07 Jan 2024" "4.2.8p17" "File Formats"
 .\"
 .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file)
 .\"
-.\" It has been AutoGen-ed September 30, 2023 at 03:20:48 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16
+.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:31 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16
 .\" From the definitions ntp.conf.def
 .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl
 .SH NAME
@@ -3451,7 +3451,7 @@ RFC5905
 .SH "AUTHORS"
 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation
 .SH "COPYRIGHT"
-Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved.
+Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved.
 This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, .
 .SH BUGS
 The syntax checking is not picky; some combinations of
diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.conf.5mdoc b/ntpd/ntp.conf.5mdoc
index a92096496..0e675b79e 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntp.conf.5mdoc
+++ b/ntpd/ntp.conf.5mdoc
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.Dd September 30 2023
+.Dd January 7 2024
 .Dt NTP_CONF 5mdoc File Formats
 .Os
 .\"  EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION  (ntp.mdoc)
 .\"
-.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  September 30, 2023 at 03:20:43 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16
+.\"  It has been AutoGen-ed  January  7, 2024 at 12:34:20 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16
 .\"  From the definitions    ntp.conf.def
 .\"  and the template file   agmdoc-cmd.tpl
 .Sh NAME
@@ -3296,7 +3296,7 @@ A snapshot of this documentation is available in HTML format in
 .Sh "AUTHORS"
 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation
 .Sh "COPYRIGHT"
-Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved.
+Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved.
 This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, .
 .Sh BUGS
 The syntax checking is not picky; some combinations of
diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.conf.html b/ntpd/ntp.conf.html
index e084fcf90..11f0d7fee 100644
--- a/ntpd/ntp.conf.html
+++ b/ntpd/ntp.conf.html
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
+
 
-
+
 
 
 NTP Configuration File User’s Manual
@@ -10,24 +10,19 @@
 
 
 
+
+
 
 
+
+
 
 
@@ -35,82 +30,76 @@ ul.no-bullet {list-style: none}
 
 
 
-

NTP Configuration File User’s Manual

-
+
+ -

NTP’s Configuration File User Manual

+

NTP’s Configuration File User Manual

This document describes the configuration file for the NTP Project’s -ntpd program. +ntpd program.

-

This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntp.conf. +

This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntp.conf.

- + + +

Short Table of Contents

- - - - - - - +

-
+
+ -

1 Description

+

1 Description

-

The behavior of ntpd can be changed by a configuration file, -by default ntp.conf. +

The behavior of ntpd can be changed by a configuration file, +by default ntp.conf.

- - - - +
-
+
+ -

1.1 Notes about ntp.conf

- - +

1.1 Notes about ntp.conf

+ +

The -ntp.conf +ntp.conf configuration file is read at initial startup by the -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) daemon in order to specify the synchronization sources, modes and other related information. Usually, it is installed in the -/etc +/etc directory, but could be installed elsewhere (see the daemon’s --c +-c command line option).

The file format is similar to other -UNIX +UNIX configuration files. Comments begin with a ‘#’ @@ -131,63 +120,52 @@ The page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp) +/usr/share/doc/ntp) contains an extended discussion of these options. In addition to the discussion of general ‘Configuration Options’, there are sections describing the following supported functionality and the options used to control it: -

    -
  • Authentication Support -
  • Monitoring Support -
  • Access Control Support -
  • Automatic NTP Configuration Options -
  • Reference Clock Support -
  • Miscellaneous Options +

    Following these is a section describing -Miscellaneous Options. +Miscellaneous Options. While there is a rich set of options available, the only required option is one or more -pool, -server, -peer, -broadcast +pool, +server, +peer, +broadcast or -manycastclient +manycastclient commands. -

    - - - - - - - - - - - - - +


    -
    +
    + -

    1.1.1 Configuration Support

    +

    1.1.1 Configuration Support

    Following is a description of the configuration commands in NTPv4. These commands have the same basic functions as in NTPv3 and @@ -197,7 +175,12 @@ classes of commands, configuration commands that configure a persistent association with a remote server or peer or reference clock, and auxiliary commands that specify environmental variables that control various related operations. -

    1.1.1.1 Configuration Commands

    +

    +
    +

    1.1.1.1 Configuration Commands

    The various modes are determined by the command keyword and the type of the required IP address. Addresses are classed by type as @@ -214,12 +197,12 @@ in some weird and even destructive behavior. is detected, support for the IPv6 address family is generated in addition to the default support of the IPv4 address family. In a few cases, including the -reslist +reslist billboard generated by -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) or -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc), +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc), IPv6 addresses are automatically generated. IPv6 addresses can be identified by the presence of colons “:” @@ -230,26 +213,26 @@ with the exception of reference clock addresses, which are always IPv4.

    Note that in contexts where a host name is expected, a --4 +-4 qualifier preceding the host name forces DNS resolution to the IPv4 namespace, while a --6 +-6 qualifier forces DNS resolution to the IPv6 namespace. See IPv6 references for the equivalent classes for that address family. -

    -
    pool address [burst] [iburst] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll] [xmtnonce]
    -
    server address [key key | autokey] [burst] [iburst] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll] [true] [xmtnonce]
    -
    peer address [key key | autokey] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll] [true] [xleave]
    -
    broadcast address [key key | autokey] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [ttl ttl] [xleave]
    -
    manycastclient address [key key | autokey] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll] [ttl ttl]
    +

    +
    pool address [burst] [iburst] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll] [xmtnonce]
    +
    server address [key key | autokey] [burst] [iburst] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll] [true] [xmtnonce]
    +
    peer address [key key | autokey] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll] [true] [xleave]
    +
    broadcast address [key key | autokey] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [ttl ttl] [xleave]
    +
    manycastclient address [key key | autokey] [version version] [prefer] [minpoll minpoll] [maxpoll maxpoll] [ttl ttl]

    These five commands specify the time server name or address to be used and the mode in which to operate. The -address +address can be either a DNS name or an IP address in dotted-quad notation. Additional information on association behavior can be found in the @@ -257,16 +240,16 @@ Additional information on association behavior can be found in the page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp). -

    -
    pool
    +/usr/share/doc/ntp). +

    +
    pool

    For type s addresses, this command mobilizes a persistent client mode association with a number of remote servers. In this mode the local clock can synchronized to the remote server, but the remote server can never be synchronized to the local clock.

    -
    server
    +
    server

    For type s and r addresses, this command mobilizes a persistent client mode association with the specified remote server or local radio clock. @@ -274,11 +257,11 @@ In this mode the local clock can synchronized to the remote server, but the remote server can never be synchronized to the local clock. This command should -not +not be used for type b or m addresses.

    -
    peer
    +
    peer

    For type s addresses (only), this command mobilizes a persistent symmetric-active mode association with the specified remote peer. @@ -291,7 +274,7 @@ the better source of time. This command should NOT be used for type b, m or r addresses.

    -
    broadcast
    +
    broadcast

    For type b and m addresses (only), this command mobilizes a persistent broadcast mode association. Multiple @@ -302,7 +285,7 @@ broadcast messages go only to the interface associated with the subnet specified, but multicast messages go to all interfaces. In broadcast mode the local server sends periodic broadcast messages to a client population at the -address +address specified, which is usually the broadcast address on (one of) the local network(s) or a multicast address assigned to NTP. The IANA @@ -313,19 +296,19 @@ messages within administrative boundaries. Ordinarily, this specification applies only to the local server operating as a sender; for operation as a broadcast client, see the -broadcastclient +broadcastclient or -multicastclient +multicastclient commands below.

    -
    manycastclient
    +
    manycastclient

    For type m addresses (only), this command mobilizes a manycast client mode association for the multicast address specified. In this case a specific address must be supplied which matches the address used on the -manycastserver +manycastserver command for the designated manycast servers. The NTP multicast address @@ -334,19 +317,19 @@ means are taken to avoid spraying large areas of the Internet with these messages and causing a possibly massive implosion of replies at the sender. The -manycastserver +manycastserver command specifies that the local server is to operate in client mode with the remote servers that are discovered as the result of broadcast/multicast messages. The client broadcasts a request message to the group address associated with the specified -address +address and specifically enabled servers respond to these messages. The client selects the servers providing the best time and continues as with the -server +server command. The remaining servers are discarded as if never heard. @@ -354,63 +337,63 @@ heard.

    Options: -

    -
    autokey
    +

    +
    autokey

    All packets sent to and received from the server or peer are to include authentication fields encrypted using the autokey scheme described in ‘Authentication Options’.

    -
    burst
    +
    burst

    when the server is reachable, send a burst of six packets instead of the usual one. The packet spacing is 2 s. This is designed to improve timekeeping quality with the -server +server command and s addresses.

    -
    iburst
    +
    iburst

    When the server is unreachable, send a burst of eight packets instead of the usual one. The packet spacing is 2 s. This is designed to speed the initial synchronization acquisition with the -server +server command and s addresses and when -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) is started with the --q +-q option.

    -
    key key
    +
    key key

    All packets sent to and received from the server or peer are to include authentication fields encrypted using the specified -key +key identifier with values from 1 to 65535, inclusive. The default is to include no encryption field.

    -
    minpoll minpoll
    -
    maxpoll maxpoll
    +
    minpoll minpoll
    +
    maxpoll maxpoll

    These options specify the minimum and maximum poll intervals for NTP messages, as a power of 2 in seconds The maximum poll interval defaults to 10 (1,024 s), but can be increased by the -maxpoll +maxpoll option to an upper limit of 17 (36.4 h). The minimum poll interval defaults to 6 (64 s), but can be decreased by the -minpoll +minpoll option to a lower limit of 4 (16 s).

    -
    noselect
    +
    noselect

    Marks the server as unused, except for display purposes. The server is discarded by the selection algroithm.

    -
    preempt
    +
    preempt

    Says the association can be preempted.

    -
    prefer
    +
    prefer

    Marks the server as preferred. All other things being equal, this host will be chosen for synchronization among a set of @@ -420,55 +403,57 @@ See the page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp) +/usr/share/doc/ntp) for further information.

    -
    true
    +
    true

    Marks the server as a truechimer, forcing the association to always survive the selection and clustering algorithms. This option should almost certainly -only +only be used while testing an association.

    -
    ttl ttl
    +
    ttl ttl

    This option is used only with broadcast server and manycast client modes. It specifies the time-to-live -ttl +ttl to use on broadcast server and multicast server and the maximum -ttl +ttl for the expanding ring search with manycast client packets. Selection of the proper value, which defaults to 127, is something of a black art and should be coordinated with the network administrator.

    -
    version version
    +
    version version

    Specifies the version number to be used for outgoing NTP packets. Versions 1-4 are the choices, with version 4 the default.

    -
    xleave
    +
    xleave

    Valid in -peer +peer and -broadcast +broadcast modes only, this flag enables interleave mode.

    -
    xmtnonce
    +
    xmtnonce

    Valid only for -server +server and -pool +pool modes, this flag puts a random number in the packet’s transmit timestamp.

    -

    1.1.1.2 Auxiliary Commands

    -
    -
    broadcastclient
    +
    +
    +

    1.1.1.2 Auxiliary Commands

    +
    +
    broadcastclient

    This command enables reception of broadcast server messages to any local interface (type b) address. Upon receiving a message for @@ -482,7 +467,7 @@ server and client should operate using symmetric-key or public-key authentication as described in ‘Authentication Options’.

    -
    manycastserver address ...
    +
    manycastserver address ...

    This command enables reception of manycast client messages to the multicast group address(es) (type m) specified. At least one @@ -496,7 +481,7 @@ and client should operate using symmetric-key or public-key authentication as described in ‘Authentication Options’.

    -
    multicastclient address ...
    +
    multicastclient address ...

    This command enables reception of multicast server messages to the multicast group address(es) (type m) specified. Upon receiving @@ -510,28 +495,31 @@ both the server and client should operate using symmetric-key or public-key authentication as described in ‘Authentication Options’.

    -
    mdnstries number
    +
    mdnstries number

    If we are participating in mDNS, after we have synched for the first time we attempt to register with the mDNS system. If that registration attempt fails, we try again at one minute intervals for up to -mdnstries +mdnstries times. After all, -ntpd +ntpd may be starting before mDNS. The default value for -mdnstries +mdnstries is 5.


    -
    +
    +
    +
    + -

    1.1.2 Authentication Support

    +

    1.1.2 Authentication Support

    Authentication support allows the NTP client to verify that the server is in fact known and trusted and not an intruder intending accidentally or on purpose to masquerade as that server. @@ -572,15 +560,15 @@ are on the Building and Installing the Distribution page.

    Authentication is configured separately for each association using the -key +key or -autokey +autokey subcommand on the -peer, -server, -broadcast +peer, +server, +broadcast and -manycastclient +manycastclient configuration commands as described in ‘Configuration Options’ page. @@ -609,16 +597,16 @@ the server certificate, verify its credentials and initialize the protocol

    The -auth +auth flag controls whether new associations or remote configuration commands require cryptographic authentication. This flag can be set or reset by the -enable +enable and -disable +disable commands and also by remote configuration commands sent by a -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) program running on another machine. If this flag is enabled, which is the default @@ -631,7 +619,7 @@ even if not cryptographic authenticated. It should be understood that operating with the -auth +auth flag disabled invites a significant vulnerability where a rogue hacker can masquerade as a falseticker and seriously @@ -648,7 +636,7 @@ the authentication process itself.

    An attractive alternative where multicast support is available is manycast mode, in which clients periodically troll for servers as described in the -Automatic NTP Configuration Options +Automatic NTP Configuration Options page. Either symmetric key or public key cryptographic authentication can be used in this mode. @@ -664,8 +652,18 @@ both symmetric key and public key cryptography are summarized below; further details are in the briefings, papers and reports at the NTP project page linked from -http://www.ntp.org/. -

    1.1.2.1 Symmetric-Key Cryptography

    +http://www.ntp.org/. +

    +
    +

    1.1.2.1 Symmetric-Key Cryptography

    The original RFC-1305 specification allows any one of possibly 65,535 keys, each distinguished by a 32-bit key identifier, to authenticate an association. @@ -675,45 +673,47 @@ authenticate NTP packets. Keys and related information are specified in a key file, usually called -ntp.keys, +ntp.keys, which must be distributed and stored using secure means beyond the scope of the NTP protocol itself. Besides the keys used for ordinary NTP associations, additional keys can be used as passwords for the -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) utility programs.

    When -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) is first started, it reads the key file specified in the -keys +keys configuration command and installs the keys in the key cache. However, individual keys must be activated with the -trusted +trusted command before use. This allows, for instance, the installation of possibly several batches of keys and then activating or deactivating each batch remotely using -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc). +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc). This also provides a revocation capability that can be used if a key becomes compromised. The -requestkey +requestkey command selects the key used as the password for the -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) utility, while the -controlkey +controlkey command selects the key used as the password for the -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) utility. -

    1.1.2.2 Public Key Cryptography

    +

    +
    +

    1.1.2.2 Public Key Cryptography

    NTPv4 supports the original NTPv3 symmetric key scheme described in RFC-1305 and in addition the Autokey protocol, which is based on public key cryptography. @@ -744,7 +744,7 @@ page.

    The specific cryptographic environment used by Autokey servers and clients is determined by a set of files and soft links generated by the -ntp-keygen(1ntpkeygenmdoc) +ntp-keygen(1ntpkeygenmdoc) program. This includes a required host key file, required certificate file and optional sign key file, @@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ along with the matching sign key. There are several schemes available in the OpenSSL software library, each identified by a specific string such as -md5WithRSAEncryption, +md5WithRSAEncryption, which stands for the MD5 message digest with RSA encryption scheme. The current NTP distribution supports @@ -774,7 +774,9 @@ This requires the configuration file in all hosts to be engineered so that, even under anticipated failure conditions, the NTP subnet will form such that every group host can find a trail to at least one trusted host. -

    1.1.2.3 Naming and Addressing

    +

    +
    +

    1.1.2.3 Naming and Addressing

    It is important to note that Autokey does not use DNS to resolve addresses, since DNS can’t be completely trusted until the name servers have synchronized clocks. @@ -787,7 +789,7 @@ DNS compromise is essential.

    By convention, the name of an Autokey host is the name returned by the Unix -gethostname(2) +gethostname(2) system call or equivalent in other systems. By the system design model, there are no provisions to allow alternate names or aliases. @@ -806,7 +808,9 @@ For this reason operation with network address translation schemes is not possible. This reflects the intended robust security model where government and corporate NTP servers are operated outside firewall perimeters. -

    1.1.2.4 Operation

    +

    +
    +

    1.1.2.4 Operation

    A specific combination of authentication scheme (none, symmetric key, public key) and identity scheme is called a cryptotype, although not all combinations are compatible. @@ -823,19 +827,19 @@ but may not represent good security practice. of mobilization, either at configuration time or some time later when a message of appropriate cryptotype arrives. When mobilized by a -server +server or -peer +peer configuration command and no -key +key or -autokey +autokey subcommands are present, the association is not authenticated; if the -key +key subcommand is present, the association is authenticated using the symmetric key ID specified; if the -autokey +autokey subcommand is present, the association is authenticated using Autokey.

    @@ -877,7 +881,7 @@ If verification fails, Bob sends Cathy a thing called a crypto-NAK, which tells her something broke. She can see the evidence using the -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) program.

    Denise has rolled her own host key and certificate. @@ -895,10 +899,12 @@ servers (or the same server, although that might not be useful). But, wise security policy might preclude some cryptotype combinations; for instance, running an identity scheme with one server and no authentication with another might not be wise. -

    1.1.2.5 Key Management

    +

    +
    +

    1.1.2.5 Key Management

    The cryptographic values used by the Autokey protocol are incorporated as a set of files generated by the -ntp-keygen(1ntpkeygenmdoc) +ntp-keygen(1ntpkeygenmdoc) utility program, including symmetric key, host key and public certificate files, as well as sign key, identity parameters and leapseconds files. @@ -907,9 +913,9 @@ certificate files can be generated by the OpenSSL utilities and certificates can be imported from public certificate authorities. Note that symmetric keys are necessary for the -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) utility programs. The remaining files are necessary only for the Autokey protocol. @@ -928,11 +934,13 @@ The certificate extension fields must not contain either a subject key identifier or a issuer key identifier field; however, an extended key usage field for a trusted host must contain the value -trustRoot;. +trustRoot;. Other extension fields are ignored. -

    1.1.2.6 Authentication Commands

    -
    -
    autokey [logsec]
    +

    +
    +

    1.1.2.6 Authentication Commands

    +
    +
    autokey [logsec]

    Specifies the interval between regenerations of the session key list used with the Autokey protocol. Note that the size of the key @@ -943,18 +951,18 @@ For poll intervals above the specified interval, a session key list with a single entry will be regenerated for every message sent.

    -
    controlkey key
    +
    controlkey key

    Specifies the key identifier to use with the -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) utility, which uses the standard protocol defined in RFC-1305. The -key +key argument is the key identifier for a trusted key, where the value can be in the range 1 to 65,535, inclusive.

    -
    crypto [cert file] [leap file] [randfile file] [host file] [gq file] [gqpar file] [iffpar file] [mvpar file] [pw password]
    +
    crypto [cert file] [leap file] [randfile file] [host file] [gq file] [gqpar file] [iffpar file] [mvpar file] [pw password]

    This command requires the OpenSSL library. It activates public key cryptography, selects the message digest and signature @@ -965,93 +973,93 @@ the default names are used as described above. Unless the complete path and name of the file are specified, the location of a file is relative to the keys directory specified in the -keysdir +keysdir command or default -/usr/local/etc. +/usr/local/etc. Following are the subcommands: -

    -
    cert file
    +

    +
    cert file

    Specifies the location of the required host public certificate file. This overrides the link -ntpkey_cert_hostname +ntpkey_cert_hostname in the keys directory.

    -
    gqpar file
    +
    gqpar file

    Specifies the location of the optional GQ parameters file. This overrides the link -ntpkey_gq_hostname +ntpkey_gq_hostname in the keys directory.

    -
    host file
    +
    host file

    Specifies the location of the required host key file. This overrides the link -ntpkey_key_hostname +ntpkey_key_hostname in the keys directory.

    -
    iffpar file
    +
    iffpar file

    Specifies the location of the optional IFF parameters file. This overrides the link -ntpkey_iff_hostname +ntpkey_iff_hostname in the keys directory.

    -
    leap file
    +
    leap file

    Specifies the location of the optional leapsecond file. This overrides the link -ntpkey_leap +ntpkey_leap in the keys directory.

    -
    mvpar file
    +
    mvpar file

    Specifies the location of the optional MV parameters file. This overrides the link -ntpkey_mv_hostname +ntpkey_mv_hostname in the keys directory.

    -
    pw password
    +
    pw password

    Specifies the password to decrypt files containing private keys and identity parameters. This is required only if these files have been encrypted.

    -
    randfile file
    +
    randfile file

    Specifies the location of the random seed file used by the OpenSSL library. The defaults are described in the main text above.

    -
    keys keyfile
    +
    keys keyfile

    Specifies the complete path and location of the MD5 key file containing the keys and key identifiers used by -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc), -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc), +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) when operating with symmetric key cryptography. This is the same operation as the --k +-k command line option.

    -
    keysdir path
    +
    keysdir path

    This command specifies the default directory path for cryptographic keys, parameters and certificates. The default is -/usr/local/etc/. +/usr/local/etc/.

    -
    requestkey key
    +
    requestkey key

    Specifies the key identifier to use with the -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) utility program, which uses a proprietary protocol specific to this implementation of -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc). +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc). The -key +key argument is a key identifier for the trusted key, where the value can be in the range 1 to 65,535, inclusive.

    -
    revoke logsec
    +
    revoke logsec

    Specifies the interval between re-randomization of certain cryptographic values used by the Autokey scheme, as a power of 2 in seconds. @@ -1063,28 +1071,30 @@ For poll intervals above the specified interval, the values will be updated for every message sent.

    -
    trustedkey key ...
    +
    trustedkey key ...

    Specifies the key identifiers which are trusted for the purposes of authenticating peers with symmetric key cryptography, as well as keys used by the -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) programs. The authentication procedures require that both the local and remote servers share the same key and key identifier for this purpose, although different keys can be used with different servers. The -key +key arguments are 32-bit unsigned integers with values from 1 to 65,535.

    -

    1.1.2.7 Error Codes

    +
    +
    +

    1.1.2.7 Error Codes

    The following error codes are reported via the NTP control and monitoring protocol trap mechanism. -

    +

    101

    (bad field format or length) The packet has invalid version, length or format. @@ -1148,44 +1158,51 @@ The identity key is missing, corrupt or bogus.


    -
    +
    +
    +
    + -

    1.1.3 Monitoring Support

    -

    ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +

    1.1.3 Monitoring Support

    +

    ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) includes a comprehensive monitoring facility suitable for continuous, long term recording of server and client timekeeping performance. See the -statistics +statistics command below for a listing and example of each type of statistics currently supported. Statistic files are managed using file generation sets and scripts in the -./scripts +./scripts directory of the source code distribution. Using these facilities and -UNIX -cron(8) +UNIX +cron(8) jobs, the data can be automatically summarized and archived for retrospective analysis. -

    1.1.3.1 Monitoring Commands

    -
    -
    statistics name ...
    +

    +
    +

    1.1.3.1 Monitoring Commands

    +
    +
    statistics name ...

    Enables writing of statistics records. Currently, eight kinds of -name +name statistics are supported. -

    -
    clockstats
    +

    +
    clockstats

    Enables recording of clock driver statistics information. Each update received from a clock driver appends a line of the following form to the file generation set named -clockstats: +clockstats:

    49213 525.624 127.127.4.1 93 226 00:08:29.606 D
     

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and time @@ -1200,13 +1217,13 @@ can be gathered and displayed as well. See information specific to each clock for further details.

    -
    cryptostats
    +
    cryptostats

    This option requires the OpenSSL cryptographic software library. It enables recording of cryptographic public key protocol information. Each message received by the protocol module appends a line of the following form to the file generation set named -cryptostats: +cryptostats:

    49213 525.624 127.127.4.1 message
     

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and time @@ -1218,12 +1235,12 @@ See the ‘Authentication Options’ section for further information.

    -
    loopstats
    +
    loopstats

    Enables recording of loop filter statistics information. Each update of the local clock outputs a line of the following form to the file generation set named -loopstats: +loopstats:

    50935 75440.031 0.000006019 13.778190 0.000351733 0.0133806
     

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and @@ -1233,7 +1250,7 @@ show time offset (seconds), frequency offset (parts per million - PPM), RMS jitter (seconds), Allan deviation (PPM) and clock discipline time constant.

    -
    peerstats
    +
    peerstats

    Enables recording of peer statistics information. This includes statistics records of all peers of a NTP server and of special @@ -1241,7 +1258,7 @@ signals, where present and configured. Each valid update appends a line of the following form to the current element of a file generation set named -peerstats: +peerstats:

    48773 10847.650 127.127.4.1 9714 -0.001605376 0.000000000 0.001424877 0.000958674
     

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and @@ -1254,7 +1271,7 @@ described in Appendix A of the NTP specification RFC 1305. The final four fields show the offset, delay, dispersion and RMS jitter, all in seconds.

    -
    rawstats
    +
    rawstats

    Enables recording of raw-timestamp statistics information. This includes statistics records of all peers of a NTP server and of @@ -1262,7 +1279,7 @@ special signals, where present and configured. Each NTP message received from a peer or clock driver appends a line of the following form to the file generation set named -rawstats: +rawstats:

    50928 2132.543 128.4.1.1 128.4.1.20 3102453281.584327000 3102453281.58622800031 02453332.540806000 3102453332.541458000
     

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and @@ -1276,12 +1293,12 @@ The timestamp values are as received and before processing by the various data smoothing and mitigation algorithms.

    -
    sysstats
    +
    sysstats

    Enables recording of ntpd statistics counters on a periodic basis. Each hour a line of the following form is appended to the file generation set named -sysstats: +sysstats:

    50928 2132.543 36000 81965 0 9546 56 71793 512 540 10 147
     

    The first two fields show the date (Modified Julian Day) and time @@ -1289,49 +1306,49 @@ set named The remaining ten fields show the statistics counter values accumulated since the last generated line. -

    -
    Time since restart 36000
    +

    +
    Time since restart 36000

    Time in hours since the system was last rebooted.

    -
    Packets received 81965
    +
    Packets received 81965

    Total number of packets received.

    -
    Packets processed 0
    +
    Packets processed 0

    Number of packets received in response to previous packets sent

    -
    Current version 9546
    +
    Current version 9546

    Number of packets matching the current NTP version.

    -
    Previous version 56
    +
    Previous version 56

    Number of packets matching the previous NTP version.

    -
    Bad version 71793
    +
    Bad version 71793

    Number of packets matching neither NTP version.

    -
    Access denied 512
    +
    Access denied 512

    Number of packets denied access for any reason.

    -
    Bad length or format 540
    +
    Bad length or format 540

    Number of packets with invalid length, format or port number.

    -
    Bad authentication 10
    +
    Bad authentication 10

    Number of packets not verified as authentic.

    -
    Rate exceeded 147
    +
    Rate exceeded 147

    Number of packets discarded due to rate limitation.

    -
    statsdir directory_path
    +
    statsdir directory_path

    Indicates the full path of a directory where statistics files should be created (see below). This keyword allows the (otherwise constant) -filegen +filegen filename prefix to be modified for file generation sets, which is useful for handling statistics logs.

    -
    filegen name [file filename] [type typename] [link | nolink] [enable | disable]
    +
    filegen name [file filename] [type typename] [link | nolink] [enable | disable]

    Configures setting of generation file set name. Generation file sets provide a means for handling files that are @@ -1350,28 +1367,28 @@ operations without the risk of disturbing the operation of ntpd. produced.)

    Note that this command can be sent from the -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) program running at a remote location. -

    -
    name
    +

    +
    name

    This is the type of the statistics records, as shown in the -statistics +statistics command.

    -
    file filename
    +
    file filename

    This is the file name for the statistics records. Filenames of set members are built from three concatenated elements -prefix, -filename +prefix, +filename and -suffix: -

    -
    prefix
    +suffix: +

    +
    prefix

    This is a constant filename path. It is not subject to modifications via the -filegen +filegen option. It is defined by the server, usually specified as a compile-time constant. @@ -1379,63 +1396,63 @@ It may, however, be configurable for individual file generation sets via other commands. For example, the prefix used with -loopstats +loopstats and -peerstats +peerstats generation can be configured using the -statsdir +statsdir option explained above.

    -
    filename
    +
    filename

    This string is directly concatenated to the prefix mentioned above (no intervening ‘/’). This can be modified using the file argument to the -filegen +filegen statement. No -.. +.. elements are allowed in this component to prevent filenames referring to parts outside the filesystem hierarchy denoted by -prefix. +prefix.

    -
    suffix
    +
    suffix

    This part is reflects individual elements of a file set. It is generated according to the type of a file set.

    -
    type typename
    +
    type typename

    A file generation set is characterized by its type. The following types are supported: -

    -
    none
    +

    +
    none

    The file set is actually a single plain file.

    -
    pid
    +
    pid

    One element of file set is used per incarnation of a ntpd server. This type does not perform any changes to file set members during runtime, however it provides an easy way of separating files belonging to different -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) server incarnations. The set member filename is built by appending a ‘.’ to concatenated -prefix +prefix and -filename +filename strings, and appending the decimal representation of the process ID of the -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) server process.

    -
    day
    +
    day

    One file generation set element is created per day. A day is defined as the period between 00:00 and 24:00 UTC. @@ -1444,19 +1461,19 @@ member suffix consists of a ‘.’ and a day specification in the form -YYYYMMdd. -YYYY +YYYYMMdd. +YYYY is a 4-digit year number (e.g., 1992). -MM +MM is a two digit month number. -dd +dd is a two digit day number. Thus, all information written at 10 December 1992 would end up in a file named -prefix -filename.19921210. +prefix +filename.19921210.

    -
    week
    +
    week

    Any file set member contains data related to a certain week of a year. The term week is defined by computing day-of-year @@ -1464,63 +1481,63 @@ modulo 7. Elements of such a file generation set are distinguished by appending the following suffix to the file set filename base: A dot, a 4-digit year number, the letter -W, +W, and a 2-digit week number. For example, information from January, 10th 1992 would end up in a file with suffix .No . Ns Ar 1992W1 .

    -
    month
    +
    month

    One generation file set element is generated per month. The file name suffix consists of a dot, a 4-digit year number, and a 2-digit month.

    -
    year
    +
    year

    One generation file element is generated per year. The filename suffix consists of a dot and a 4 digit year number.

    -
    age
    +
    age

    This type of file generation sets changes to a new element of the file set every 24 hours of server operation. The filename suffix consists of a dot, the letter -a, +a, and an 8-digit number. This number is taken to be the number of seconds the server is running at the start of the corresponding 24-hour period. Information is only written to a file generation by specifying -enable; +enable; output is prevented by specifying -disable. +disable.

    -
    link | nolink
    +
    link | nolink

    It is convenient to be able to access the current element of a file generation set by a fixed name. This feature is enabled by specifying -link +link and disabled using -nolink. +nolink. If link is specified, a hard link from the current file set element to a file without suffix is created. When there is already a file with this name and the number of links of this file is one, it is renamed appending a dot, the letter -C, +C, and the pid of the -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) server process. When the number of links is greater than one, the file is unlinked. This allows the current file to be accessed by a constant name.

    -
    enable | disable
    +
    enable | disable

    Enables or disables the recording function.

    @@ -1529,13 +1546,16 @@ allows the current file to be accessed by a constant name.

    -
    +
    +
    +
    + -

    1.1.4 Access Control Support

    +

    1.1.4 Access Control Support

    The -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) daemon implements a general purpose address/mask based restriction list. The list contains address/match entries sorted first @@ -1551,7 +1571,7 @@ Additional information and examples can be found in the page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp). +/usr/share/doc/ntp).

    The restriction facility was implemented in conformance with the access policies for the original NSFnet backbone @@ -1567,7 +1587,7 @@ by a determined cracker.

    Clients can be denied service because they are explicitly included in the restrict list created by the -restrict +restrict command or implicitly as the result of cryptographic or rate limit violations. @@ -1582,7 +1602,12 @@ an indefinite period. When a client or network is denied access for an indefinite period, the only way at present to remove the restrictions is by restarting the server. -

    1.1.4.1 The Kiss-of-Death Packet

    +

    +
    +

    1.1.4.1 The Kiss-of-Death Packet

    Ordinarily, packets denied service are simply dropped with no further action except incrementing statistics counters. Sometimes a @@ -1595,12 +1620,12 @@ KoD packets have the leap bits set unsynchronized and stratum set to zero and the reference identifier field set to a four-byte ASCII code. If the -noserve +noserve or -notrust +notrust flag of the matching restrict list entry is set, the code is "DENY"; if the -limited +limited flag is set and the rate limit is exceeded, the code is "RATE". Finally, if a cryptographic violation occurs, the code is "CRYP". @@ -1617,31 +1642,33 @@ to restart the protocol at both the client and server. This happens automatically at the client when the association times out. It will happen at the server only if the server operator cooperates. -

    1.1.4.2 Access Control Commands

    -
    -
    discard [average avg] [minimum min] [monitor prob]
    +

    +
    +

    1.1.4.2 Access Control Commands

    +
    +
    discard [average avg] [minimum min] [monitor prob]

    Set the parameters of the -limited +limited facility which protects the server from client abuse. The -average +average subcommand specifies the minimum average packet spacing in log2 seconds, defaulting to 3 (8s), while the -minimum +minimum subcommand specifies the minimum packet spacing in seconds, defaulting to 2. Packets that violate these minima are discarded and a kiss-o’-death packet returned if enabled. The -monitor +monitor subcommand indirectly specifies the probability of replacing the oldest entry from the monitor (MRU) list of recent requests used to enforce rate controls, when that list is at its maximum size. The probability of replacing the oldest entry is the age of that entry in seconds divided by the -monitor +monitor value, default 3000. For example, if the oldest entry in the MRU list represents a request 300 seconds ago, by default the probability of replacing it with an @@ -1649,42 +1676,42 @@ entry representing the client request being processed now is 10%. Conversely, if the oldest entry is more than 3000 seconds old, the probability is 100%.

    -
    restrict address [mask mask] [ippeerlimit int] [flag ...]
    +
    restrict address [mask mask] [ippeerlimit int] [flag ...]

    The -address +address argument expressed in numeric form is the address of a host or network. Alternatively, the -address +address argument can be a valid hostname. When a hostname is provided, a restriction entry is created for each address the hostname resolves to, and any provided -mask +mask is ignored and an individual host mask is used for each entry. The -mask +mask argument expressed in numeric form defaults to all bits lit, meaning that the -address +address is treated as the address of an individual host. A default entry with address and mask all zeroes is always included and is always the first entry in the list. Note that text string -default, +default, with no mask option, may be used to indicate the default entry. The -ippeerlimit +ippeerlimit directive limits the number of peer requests for each IP to -int, +int, where a value of -1 means "unlimited", the current default. A value of 0 means "none". There would usually be at most 1 peering request per IP, but if the remote peering requests are behind a proxy there could well be more than 1 per IP. In the current implementation, -flag +flag always restricts access, i.e., an entry with no flags indicates that free access to the server is to be given. @@ -1697,36 +1724,36 @@ restrict informational queries and attempts to do run-time reconfiguration of the server. One or more of the following flags may be specified: -

    -
    ignore
    +

    +
    ignore

    Deny packets of all kinds, including -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) queries.

    -
    kod
    +
    kod

    If this flag is set when a rate violation occurs, a kiss-o’-death (KoD) packet is sometimes sent. KoD packets are rate limited to no more than one per minimum average interpacket spacing, set by -discard average +discard average defaulting to 8s. Otherwise, no response is sent.

    -
    limited
    +
    limited

    Deny service if the packet spacing violates the lower limits specified in the -discard +discard command. A history of clients is kept using the monitoring capability of -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc). +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc). Thus, monitoring is always active as long as there is a restriction entry with the -limited +limited flag.

    -
    lowpriotrap
    +
    lowpriotrap

    Declare traps set by matching hosts to be low priority. The number of traps a server can maintain is limited (the current limit @@ -1737,75 +1764,75 @@ This flag modifies the assignment algorithm by allowing low priority traps to be overridden by later requests for normal priority traps.

    -
    noepeer
    +
    noepeer

    Deny ephemeral peer requests, even if they come from an authenticated source. Note that the ability to use a symmetric key for authentication may be restricted to one or more IPs or subnets via the third field of the -ntp.keys +ntp.keys file. This restriction is not enabled by default, to maintain backward compatability. Expect -noepeer +noepeer to become the default in ntp-4.4.

    -
    nomodify
    +
    nomodify

    Deny -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) queries which attempt to modify the state of the server (i.e., run time reconfiguration). Queries which return information are permitted.

    -
    noquery
    +
    noquery

    Deny -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) queries. Time service is not affected.

    -
    nopeer
    +
    nopeer

    Deny unauthenticated packets which would result in mobilizing a new association. This includes broadcast and symmetric active packets when a configured association does not exist. It also includes -pool +pool associations, so if you want to use servers from a -pool +pool directive and also want to use -nopeer +nopeer by default, you’ll want a -restrict source ... +restrict source ... line as well that does -not +not include the -nopeer +nopeer directive.

    -
    noserve
    +
    noserve

    Deny all packets except -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) queries.

    -
    notrap
    +
    notrap

    Decline to provide mode 6 control message trap service to matching hosts. The trap service is a subsystem of the -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) control message protocol which is intended for use by remote event logging programs.

    -
    notrust
    +
    notrust

    Deny service unless the packet is cryptographically authenticated.

    -
    ntpport
    +
    ntpport

    This is actually a match algorithm modifier, rather than a restriction flag. Its presence causes the restriction entry to be @@ -1813,19 +1840,19 @@ matched only if the source port in the packet is the standard NTP UDP port (123). There can be two restriction entries with the same IP address if one specifies -ntpport +ntpport and the other does not. The -ntpport +ntpport entry is considered more specific and is sorted later in the list.

    -
    serverresponse fuzz
    +
    serverresponse fuzz

    When reponding to server requests, fuzz the low order bits of the -reftime. +reftime.

    -
    version
    +
    version

    Deny packets that do not match the current NTP version.

    @@ -1834,36 +1861,46 @@ fuzz the low order bits of the ntpport, for each of the local host’s interface addresses are inserted into the table at startup to prevent ntpd from attempting to synchronize to itself, such as with -manycastclient +manycastclient when -manycast +manycast is also specified with the same multicast address. A default entry is also always present, though if it is otherwise unconfigured; no flags are associated with the default entry (i.e., everything besides your own NTP server is unrestricted).

    -
    delrestrict [source] address
    +
    delrestrict [source] address

    Remove a previously-set restriction. This is useful for runtime configuration via -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) . If -source +source is specified, a dynamic restriction created from the -restrict source +restrict source template at the time an association was added is removed. Without -source +source a static restriction is removed.


    -
    +
    +
    +
    + -

    1.1.5 Automatic NTP Configuration Options

    -

    1.1.5.1 Manycasting

    +

    1.1.5 Automatic NTP Configuration Options

    + +
    +

    1.1.5.1 Manycasting

    Manycasting is a automatic discovery and configuration paradigm new to NTPv4. It is intended as a means for a multicast client @@ -1891,19 +1928,19 @@ and is generally considered stronger, at least with relatively large key sizes. It is implemented using the Autokey protocol and the OpenSSL cryptographic library available from -http://www.openssl.org/. +http://www.openssl.org/. The library can also be used with other NTPv4 modes as well and is highly recommended, especially for broadcast modes.

    A persistent manycast client association is configured using the -manycastclient +manycastclient command, which is similar to the -server +server command but with a multicast (IPv4 class -D +D or IPv6 prefix -FF) +FF) group address. The IANA has designated IPv4 address 224.1.1.1 and IPv6 address FF05::101 (site local) for NTP. @@ -1916,7 +1953,7 @@ as different group address, each one serving as a template for a future ephemeral unicast client/server association.

    Manycast servers configured with the -manycastserver +manycastserver command listen on the specified group address for manycast client messages. Note the distinction between manycast client, @@ -1955,23 +1992,23 @@ as much as possible the volume of manycast client messages and the effects of implosion due to near-simultaneous arrival of manycast server messages. The strategy is determined by the -manycastclient, -tos +manycastclient, +tos and -ttl +ttl configuration commands. The manycast poll interval is normally eight times the system poll interval, which starts out at the -minpoll +minpoll value specified in the -manycastclient, +manycastclient, command and, under normal circumstances, increments to the -maxpolll +maxpolll value specified in this command. Initially, the TTL is set at the minimum hops specified by the -ttl +ttl command. At each retransmission the TTL is increased until reaching the maximum hops specified by this command or a sufficient @@ -1981,43 +2018,43 @@ Further retransmissions use the same TTL.

    The quality and reliability of the suite of associations discovered by the manycast client is determined by the NTP mitigation algorithms and the -minclock +minclock and -minsane +minsane values specified in the -tos +tos configuration command. At least -minsane +minsane candidate servers must be available and the mitigation algorithms produce at least -minclock +minclock survivors in order to synchronize the clock. Byzantine agreement principles require at least four candidates in order to correctly discard a single falseticker. For legacy purposes, -minsane +minsane defaults to 1 and -minclock +minclock defaults to 3. For manycast service -minsane +minsane should be explicitly set to 4, assuming at least that number of servers are available.

    If at least -minclock +minclock servers are found, the manycast poll interval is immediately set to eight times -maxpoll. +maxpoll. If less than -minclock +minclock servers are found when the TTL has reached the maximum hops, the manycast poll interval is doubled. For each transmission after that, the poll interval is doubled again until reaching the maximum of eight times -maxpoll. +maxpoll. Further transmissions use the same poll interval and TTL values. Note that while all this is going on, @@ -2029,7 +2066,7 @@ specified by the network router configuration and, in the case of IPv6, the link/site scope prefix. By default, the increment for TTL hops is 32 starting from 31; however, the -ttl +ttl configuration command can be used to modify the values to match the scope rules.

    @@ -2044,19 +2081,19 @@ in TTL range will eventually find all primary servers in TTL range, which is probably not the most common objective in large networks. The -tos +tos command can be used to modify this behavior. Servers with stratum below -floor +floor or above -ceiling +ceiling specified in the -tos +tos command are strongly discouraged during the selection process; however, these servers may be temporally accepted if the number of servers within TTL range is less than -minclock. +minclock.

    The above actions occur for each manycast client message, which repeats at the designated poll interval. @@ -2065,7 +2102,7 @@ subsequent manycast server replies are discarded, since that would result in a duplicate association. If during a poll interval the number of client associations falls below -minclock, +minclock, all manycast client prototype associations are reset to the initial poll interval and TTL hops and operation resumes from the beginning. @@ -2075,7 +2112,7 @@ all manycast servers in TTL range to respond. The result could well be an implosion, either minor or major, depending on the number of servers in range. The recommended value for -maxpoll +maxpoll is 12 (4,096 s).

    It is possible and frequently useful to configure a host @@ -2089,9 +2126,9 @@ subnet of two primary servers and a hundred or more dependent clients. With two exceptions, all servers and clients have identical configuration files including both -multicastclient +multicastclient and -multicastserver +multicastserver commands using, for instance, multicast group address 239.1.1.1. The only exception is that each primary server @@ -2100,12 +2137,12 @@ reference source such as a GPS receiver.

    The remaining configuration files for all secondary servers and clients have the same contents, except for the -tos +tos command, which is specific for each stratum level. For stratum 1 and stratum 2 servers, that command is not necessary. For stratum 3 and above servers the -floor +floor value is set to the intended stratum number. Thus, all stratum 3 configuration files are identical, all stratum 4 files are identical and so forth. @@ -2123,27 +2160,29 @@ will time out the corresponding association and re-associate accordingly.

    Some administrators prefer to avoid running -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) continuously and run either -sntp(1sntpmdoc) +sntp(1sntpmdoc) or -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) --q +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +-q as a cron job. In either case the servers must be configured in advance and the program fails if none are available when the cron job runs. A really slick application of manycast is with -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) --q. +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +-q. The program wakes up, scans the local landscape looking for the usual suspects, selects the best from among the rascals, sets the clock and then departs. Servers do not have to be configured in advance and all clients throughout the network can have the same configuration file. -

    1.1.5.2 Manycast Interactions with Autokey

    +

    +
    +

    1.1.5.2 Manycast Interactions with Autokey

    Each time a manycast client sends a client mode packet to a multicast group address, all manycast servers in scope generate a reply including the host name @@ -2173,9 +2212,11 @@ At the same time, the manycast scheme starts all over from the beginning and the expanding ring shrinks to the minimum and increments from there while collecting all servers in scope. -

    1.1.5.3 Broadcast Options

    -
    -
    tos [bcpollbstep gate]
    +

    +
    +

    1.1.5.3 Broadcast Options

    +
    +
    tos [bcpollbstep gate]

    This command provides a way to delay, by the specified number of broadcast poll intervals, believing backward time steps from a broadcast server. @@ -2190,9 +2231,11 @@ This value defaults to 0, but can be changed to any number of poll intervals between 0 and 4.

    -

    1.1.5.4 Manycast Options

    -
    -
    tos [ceiling ceiling | cohort { 0 | 1 } | floor floor | minclock minclock | minsane minsane]
    +
    +
    +

    1.1.5.4 Manycast Options

    +
    +
    tos [ceiling ceiling | cohort { 0 | 1 } | floor floor | minclock minclock | minsane minsane]

    This command affects the clock selection and clustering algorithms. It can be used to select the quality and @@ -2200,17 +2243,17 @@ quantity of peers used to synchronize the system clock and is most useful in manycast mode. The variables operate as follows: -

    -
    ceiling ceiling
    +

    +
    ceiling ceiling

    Peers with strata above -ceiling +ceiling will be discarded if there are at least -minclock +minclock peers remaining. This value defaults to 15, but can be changed to any number from 1 to 15.

    -
    cohort {0 | 1}
    +
    cohort {0 | 1}

    This is a binary flag which enables (0) or disables (1) manycast server replies to manycast clients with the same stratum level. @@ -2219,25 +2262,25 @@ large numbers of clients with the same stratum level are present. The default is to enable these replies.

    -
    floor floor
    +
    floor floor

    Peers with strata below -floor +floor will be discarded if there are at least -minclock +minclock peers remaining. This value defaults to 1, but can be changed to any number from 1 to 15.

    -
    minclock minclock
    +
    minclock minclock

    The clustering algorithm repeatedly casts out outlier associations until no more than -minclock +minclock associations remain. This value defaults to 3, but can be changed to any number from 1 to the number of configured sources.

    -
    minsane minsane
    +
    minsane minsane

    This is the minimum number of candidates available to the clock selection algorithm in order to produce one or more truechimers for the clustering algorithm. @@ -2247,13 +2290,13 @@ The default is 1 for legacy purposes. However, according to principles of Byzantine agreement, -minsane +minsane should be at least 4 in order to detect and discard a single falseticker.

    -
    ttl hop ...
    +
    ttl hop ...

    This command specifies a list of TTL values in increasing order, up to 8 values can be specified. In manycast mode these values are used in turn @@ -2263,11 +2306,14 @@ multiples of 32 starting at 31.


    -
    +
    +
    +
    + -

    1.1.6 Reference Clock Support

    +

    1.1.6 Reference Clock Support

    The NTP Version 4 daemon supports some three dozen different radio, satellite and modem reference clocks plus a special pseudo-clock used for backup or when no other clock source is available. @@ -2277,7 +2323,7 @@ be found in the page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp). +/usr/share/doc/ntp). Additional information can be found in the pages linked there, including the "Debugging Hints for Reference Clock Drivers" @@ -2286,14 +2332,14 @@ and pages (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp). +/usr/share/doc/ntp). In addition, support for a PPS signal is available as described in the "Pulse-per-second (PPS) Signal Interfacing" page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp). +/usr/share/doc/ntp). Many drivers support special line discipline/streams modules which can significantly improve the accuracy using the driver. @@ -2303,7 +2349,7 @@ described in the page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp). +/usr/share/doc/ntp).

    A reference clock will generally (though not always) be a radio timecode receiver which is synchronized to a source of standard @@ -2322,7 +2368,7 @@ in a scalding remark to the system log file, but is otherwise non hazardous.

    For the purposes of configuration, -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) treats reference clocks in a manner analogous to normal NTP peers as much as possible. @@ -2330,12 +2376,12 @@ Reference clocks are identified by a syntactically correct but invalid IP address, in order to distinguish them from normal NTP peers. Reference clock addresses are of the form -127.127.t.u, +127.127.t.u, where -t +t is an integer denoting the clock type and -u +u indicates the unit number in the range 0-3. While it may seem overkill, it is in fact @@ -2343,24 +2389,24 @@ sometimes useful to configure multiple reference clocks of the same type, in which case the unit numbers must be unique.

    The -server +server command is used to configure a reference clock, where the -address +address argument in that command is the clock address. The -key, -version +key, +version and -ttl +ttl options are not used for reference clock support. The -mode +mode option is added for reference clock support, as described below. The -prefer +prefer option can be useful to persuade the server to cherish a reference clock with somewhat more enthusiasm than other reference clocks or peers. @@ -2369,67 +2415,71 @@ information on this option can be found in the "Mitigation Rules and the prefer Keyword" (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp) +/usr/share/doc/ntp) page. The -minpoll +minpoll and -maxpoll +maxpoll options have meaning only for selected clock drivers. See the individual clock driver document pages for additional information.

    The -fudge +fudge command is used to provide additional information for individual clock drivers and normally follows immediately after the -server +server command. The -address +address argument specifies the clock address. The -refid +refid and -stratum +stratum options can be used to override the defaults for the device. There are two optional device-dependent time offsets and four flags that can be included in the -fudge +fudge command as well.

    The stratum number of a reference clock is by default zero. Since the -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) daemon adds one to the stratum of each peer, a primary server ordinarily displays an external stratum of one. In order to provide engineered backups, it is often useful to specify the reference clock stratum as greater than zero. The -stratum +stratum option is used for this purpose. Also, in cases involving both a reference clock and a pulse-per-second (PPS) discipline signal, it is useful to specify the reference clock identifier as other than the default, depending on the driver. The -refid +refid option is used for this purpose. Except where noted, these options apply to all clock drivers. -

    1.1.6.1 Reference Clock Commands

    -
    -
    server 127.127.t.u [prefer] [mode int] [minpoll int] [maxpoll int]
    +

    +
    +

    1.1.6.1 Reference Clock Commands

    +
    +
    server 127.127.t.u [prefer] [mode int] [minpoll int] [maxpoll int]

    This command can be used to configure reference clocks in special ways. The options are interpreted as follows: -

    -
    prefer
    +

    +
    prefer

    Marks the reference clock as preferred. All other things being equal, this host will be chosen for synchronization among a set of @@ -2439,10 +2489,10 @@ See the page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp) +/usr/share/doc/ntp) for further information.

    -
    mode int
    +
    mode int

    Specifies a mode number which is interpreted in a device-specific fashion. For instance, it selects a dialing @@ -2450,39 +2500,39 @@ protocol in the ACTS driver and a device subtype in the parse drivers.

    -
    minpoll int
    -
    maxpoll int
    +
    minpoll int
    +
    maxpoll int

    These options specify the minimum and maximum polling interval for reference clock messages, as a power of 2 in seconds For most directly connected reference clocks, both -minpoll +minpoll and -maxpoll +maxpoll default to 6 (64 s). For modem reference clocks, -minpoll +minpoll defaults to 10 (17.1 m) and -maxpoll +maxpoll defaults to 14 (4.5 h). The allowable range is 4 (16 s) to 17 (36.4 h) inclusive.

    -
    fudge 127.127.t.u [time1 sec] [time2 sec] [stratum int] [refid string] [mode int] [flag1 0 | 1] [flag2 0 | 1] [flag3 0 | 1] [flag4 0 | 1]
    +
    fudge 127.127.t.u [time1 sec] [time2 sec] [stratum int] [refid string] [mode int] [flag1 0 | 1] [flag2 0 | 1] [flag3 0 | 1] [flag4 0 | 1]

    This command can be used to configure reference clocks in special ways. It must immediately follow the -server +server command which configures the driver. Note that the same capability is possible at run time using the -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) program. The options are interpreted as follows: -

    -
    time1 sec
    +

    +
    time1 sec

    Specifies a constant to be added to the time offset produced by the driver, a fixed-point decimal number in seconds. This is used @@ -2502,17 +2552,17 @@ Note: in order to facilitate calibration when more than one radio clock or PPS signal is supported, a special calibration feature is available. It takes the form of an argument to the -enable +enable command described in -Miscellaneous Options +Miscellaneous Options page and operates as described in the "Reference Clock Drivers" page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp). +/usr/share/doc/ntp).

    -
    time2 secs
    +
    time2 secs

    Specifies a fixed-point decimal number in seconds, which is interpreted in a driver-dependent way. See the descriptions of @@ -2521,22 +2571,22 @@ specific drivers in the page (available as part of the HTML documentation provided in -/usr/share/doc/ntp ). +/usr/share/doc/ntp ).

    -
    stratum int
    +
    stratum int

    Specifies the stratum number assigned to the driver, an integer between 0 and 15. This number overrides the default stratum number ordinarily assigned by the driver itself, usually zero.

    -
    refid string
    +
    refid string

    Specifies an ASCII string of from one to four characters which defines the reference identifier used by the driver. This string overrides the default identifier ordinarily assigned by the driver itself.

    -
    mode int
    +
    mode int

    Specifies a mode number which is interpreted in a device-specific fashion. For instance, it selects a dialing @@ -2544,25 +2594,25 @@ protocol in the ACTS driver and a device subtype in the parse drivers.

    -
    flag1 0 | 1
    -
    flag2 0 | 1
    -
    flag3 0 | 1
    -
    flag4 0 | 1
    +
    flag1 0 | 1
    +
    flag2 0 | 1
    +
    flag3 0 | 1
    +
    flag4 0 | 1

    These four flags are used for customizing the clock driver. The interpretation of these values, and whether they are used at all, is a function of the particular clock driver. However, by convention -flag4 +flag4 is used to enable recording monitoring data to the -clockstats +clockstats file configured with the -filegen +filegen command. Further information on the -filegen +filegen command can be found in ‘Monitoring Options’.

    @@ -2570,13 +2620,16 @@ command can be found in

    -
    +
    +
    +
    + -

    1.1.7 Miscellaneous Options

    -
    -
    broadcastdelay seconds
    +

    1.1.7 Miscellaneous Options

    +
    +
    broadcastdelay seconds

    The broadcast and multicast modes require a special calibration to determine the network delay between the local and remote servers. @@ -2592,12 +2645,12 @@ number between 0.003 and 0.007 seconds is appropriate. The default when this command is not used is 0.004 seconds.

    -
    driftfile driftfile
    +
    driftfile driftfile

    This command specifies the complete path and name of the file used to record the frequency of the local clock oscillator. This is the same operation as the --f +-f command line option. If the file exists, it is read at startup in order to set the initial frequency and then updated once per @@ -2615,92 +2668,92 @@ The file is updated by first writing the current drift value into a temporary file and then renaming this file to replace the old version. This implies that -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) must have write permission for the directory the drift file is located in, and that file system links, symbolic or otherwise, should be avoided.

    -
    dscp value
    +
    dscp value

    This option specifies the Differentiated Services Control Point (DSCP) value, a 6-bit code. The default value is 46, signifying Expedited Forwarding.

    -
    enable [auth | bclient | calibrate | kernel | mode7 | monitor | ntp | stats | peer_clear_digest_early | unpeer_crypto_early | unpeer_crypto_nak_early | unpeer_digest_early]
    -
    disable [auth | bclient | calibrate | kernel | mode7 | monitor | ntp | stats | peer_clear_digest_early | unpeer_crypto_early | unpeer_crypto_nak_early | unpeer_digest_early]
    +
    enable [auth | bclient | calibrate | kernel | mode7 | monitor | ntp | stats | peer_clear_digest_early | unpeer_crypto_early | unpeer_crypto_nak_early | unpeer_digest_early]
    +
    disable [auth | bclient | calibrate | kernel | mode7 | monitor | ntp | stats | peer_clear_digest_early | unpeer_crypto_early | unpeer_crypto_nak_early | unpeer_digest_early]

    Provides a way to enable or disable various server options. Flags not mentioned are unaffected. Note that all of these flags can be controlled remotely using the -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) utility program. -

    -
    auth
    +

    +
    auth

    Enables the server to synchronize with unconfigured peers only if the peer has been correctly authenticated using either public key or private key cryptography. The default for this flag is -enable. +enable.

    -
    bclient
    +
    bclient

    Enables the server to listen for a message from a broadcast or multicast server, as in the -multicastclient +multicastclient command with default address. The default for this flag is -disable. +disable.

    -
    calibrate
    +
    calibrate

    Enables the calibrate feature for reference clocks. The default for this flag is -disable. +disable.

    -
    kernel
    +
    kernel

    Enables the kernel time discipline, if available. The default for this flag is -enable +enable if support is available, otherwise -disable. +disable.

    -
    mode7
    +
    mode7

    Enables processing of NTP mode 7 implementation-specific requests which are used by the deprecated -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) program. The default for this flag is disable. This flag is excluded from runtime configuration using -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc). +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc). The -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) program provides the same capabilities as -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) using standard mode 6 requests.

    -
    monitor
    +
    monitor

    Enables the monitoring facility. See the -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) program and the -monlist +monlist command or further information. The default for this flag is -enable. +enable.

    -
    ntp
    +
    ntp

    Enables time and frequency discipline. In effect, this switch opens and closes the feedback loop, which is useful for testing. The default for this flag is -enable. +enable.

    -
    peer_clear_digest_early
    +
    peer_clear_digest_early

    By default, if -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) is using autokey and it receives a crypto-NAK packet that passes the duplicate packet and origin timestamp checks @@ -2713,23 +2766,23 @@ If you have active noticable problems with this type of DoS attack then you should consider disabling this option. You can check your -peerstats +peerstats file for evidence of any of these attacks. The default for this flag is -enable. +enable.

    -
    stats
    +
    stats

    Enables the statistics facility. See the ‘Monitoring Options’ section for further information. The default for this flag is -disable. +disable.

    -
    unpeer_crypto_early
    +
    unpeer_crypto_early

    By default, if -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) receives an autokey packet that fails TEST9, a crypto failure, the association is immediately cleared. @@ -2744,15 +2797,15 @@ disabling this flag will delay tearing down the association until the reachability counter becomes zero. You can check your -peerstats +peerstats file for evidence of any of these attacks. The default for this flag is -enable. +enable.

    -
    unpeer_crypto_nak_early
    +
    unpeer_crypto_nak_early

    By default, if -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) receives a crypto-NAK packet that passes the duplicate packet and origin timestamp checks the association is immediately cleared. @@ -2764,15 +2817,15 @@ If you have active noticable problems with this type of DoS attack then you should consider disabling this option. You can check your -peerstats +peerstats file for evidence of any of these attacks. The default for this flag is -enable. +enable.

    -
    unpeer_digest_early
    +
    unpeer_digest_early

    By default, if -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) receives what should be an authenticated packet that passes other packet sanity checks but contains an invalid digest @@ -2785,15 +2838,15 @@ If you have active noticable problems with this type of DoS attack then you should consider disabling this option. You can check your -peerstats +peerstats file for evidence of any of these attacks. The default for this flag is -enable. +enable.

    -
    includefile includefile
    +
    includefile includefile

    This command allows additional configuration commands to be included from a separate file. Include files may @@ -2801,15 +2854,15 @@ be nested to a depth of five; upon reaching the end of any include file, command processing resumes in the previous configuration file. This option is useful for sites that run -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) on multiple hosts, with (mostly) common options (e.g., a restriction list).

    -
    interface [listen | ignore | drop] [all | ipv4 | ipv6 | wildcard name | address [/ prefixlen]]
    +
    interface [listen | ignore | drop] [all | ipv4 | ipv6 | wildcard name | address [/ prefixlen]]

    The -interface +interface directive controls which network addresses -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) opens, and whether input is dropped without processing. The first parameter determines the action for addresses which match the second parameter. @@ -2817,66 +2870,66 @@ The second parameter specifies a class of addresses, or a specific interface name, or an address. In the address case, -prefixlen +prefixlen determines how many bits must match for this rule to apply. -ignore +ignore prevents opening matching addresses, -drop +drop causes -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) to open the address and drop all received packets without examination. Multiple -interface +interface directives can be used. The last rule which matches a particular address determines the action for it. -interface +interface directives are disabled if any --I, ---interface, --L, +-I, +--interface, +-L, or ---novirtualips +--novirtualips command-line options are specified in the configuration file, all available network addresses are opened. The -nic +nic directive is an alias for -interface. +interface.

    -
    leapfile leapfile
    +
    leapfile leapfile

    This command loads the IERS leapseconds file and initializes the leapsecond values for the next leapsecond event, leapfile expiration time, and TAI offset. The file can be obtained directly from the IERS at -https://hpiers.obspm.fr/iers/bul/bulc/ntp/leap-seconds.list +https://hpiers.obspm.fr/iers/bul/bulc/ntp/leap-seconds.list or -ftp://hpiers.obspm.fr/iers/bul/bulc/ntp/leap-seconds.list. +ftp://hpiers.obspm.fr/iers/bul/bulc/ntp/leap-seconds.list. The -leapfile +leapfile is scanned when -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) processes the -leapfile directive or when -ntpd detects that the -leapfile +leapfile directive or when +ntpd detects that the +leapfile has changed. -ntpd +ntpd checks once a day to see if the -leapfile +leapfile has changed. The -update-leap(1update_leapmdoc) +update-leap(1update_leapmdoc) script can be run to see if the -leapfile +leapfile should be updated.

    -
    leapsmearinterval seconds
    +
    leapsmearinterval seconds

    This EXPERIMENTAL option is only available if -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) was built with the ---enable-leap-smear +--enable-leap-smear option to the -configure +configure script. It specifies the interval over which a leap second correction will be applied. Recommended values for this option are between @@ -2884,16 +2937,16 @@ Recommended values for this option are between .Sy DO NOT USE THIS OPTION ON PUBLIC-ACCESS SERVERS! See http://bugs.ntp.org/2855 for more information.

    -
    logconfig configkeyword
    +
    logconfig configkeyword

    This command controls the amount and type of output written to the system -syslog(3) +syslog(3) facility or the alternate -logfile +logfile log file. By default, all output is turned on. All -configkeyword +configkeyword keywords can be prefixed with ‘=’, ‘+’ @@ -2902,36 +2955,36 @@ and where ‘=’ sets the -syslog(3) +syslog(3) priority mask, ‘+’ adds and ‘-’ removes messages. -syslog(3) +syslog(3) messages can be controlled in four classes -(clock, peer, sys and sync). +(clock, peer, sys and sync). Within these classes four types of messages can be controlled: informational messages -(info), +(info), event messages -(events), +(events), statistics messages -(statistics) +(statistics) and status messages -(status). +(status).

    Configuration keywords are formed by concatenating the message class with the event class. The -all +all prefix can be used instead of a message class. A message class may also be followed by the -all +all keyword to enable/disable all messages of the respective message class. Thus, a minimal log configuration @@ -2939,7 +2992,7 @@ could look like this:

    logconfig =syncstatus +sysevents
     

    This would just list the synchronizations state of -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) and the major system events. For a simple reference server, the following minimum message configuration could be useful: @@ -2950,86 +3003,86 @@ synchronization information. All other events and messages about peers, system events and so on is suppressed.

    -
    logfile logfile
    +
    logfile logfile

    This command specifies the location of an alternate log file to be used instead of the default system -syslog(3) +syslog(3) facility. This is the same operation as the --l +-l command line option.

    -
    mru [maxdepth count | maxmem kilobytes | mindepth count | maxage seconds | initialloc count | initmem kilobytes | incalloc count | incmem kilobytes]
    +
    mru [maxdepth count | maxmem kilobytes | mindepth count | maxage seconds | initialloc count | initmem kilobytes | incalloc count | incmem kilobytes]

    Controls size limite of the monitoring facility’s Most Recently Used (MRU) list of client addresses, which is also used by the rate control facility. -

    -
    maxdepth count
    -
    maxmem kilobytes
    +

    +
    maxdepth count
    +
    maxmem kilobytes

    Equivalent upper limits on the size of the MRU list, in terms of entries or kilobytes. The acutal limit will be up to -incalloc +incalloc entries or -incmem +incmem kilobytes larger. As with all of the -mru +mru options offered in units of entries or kilobytes, if both -maxdepth +maxdepth and -maxmem are used, the last one used controls. +maxmem are used, the last one used controls. The default is 1024 kilobytes.

    -
    mindepth count
    +
    mindepth count

    Lower limit on the MRU list size. When the MRU list has fewer than -mindepth +mindepth entries, existing entries are never removed to make room for newer ones, regardless of their age. The default is 600 entries.

    -
    maxage seconds
    +
    maxage seconds

    Once the MRU list has -mindepth +mindepth entries and an additional client is to ba added to the list, if the oldest entry was updated more than -maxage +maxage seconds ago, that entry is removed and its storage is reused. If the oldest entry was updated more recently the MRU list is grown, subject to -maxdepth / moxmem. +maxdepth / moxmem. The default is 64 seconds.

    -
    initalloc count
    -
    initmem kilobytes
    +
    initalloc count
    +
    initmem kilobytes

    Initial memory allocation at the time the monitoringfacility is first enabled, in terms of the number of entries or kilobytes. The default is 4 kilobytes.

    -
    incalloc count
    -
    incmem kilobytes
    +
    incalloc count
    +
    incmem kilobytes

    Size of additional memory allocations when growing the MRU list, in entries or kilobytes. The default is 4 kilobytes.

    -
    nonvolatile threshold
    +
    nonvolatile threshold

    Specify the -threshold +threshold delta in seconds before an hourly change to the -driftfile +driftfile (frequency file) will be written, with a default value of 1e-7 (0.1 PPM). The frequency file is inspected each hour. If the difference between the current frequency and the last value written exceeds the threshold, the file is written and the -threshold +threshold becomes the new threshold value. If the threshold is not exceeeded, it is reduced by half. This is intended to reduce the number of file writes for embedded systems with nonvolatile memory.

    -
    phone dial ...
    +
    phone dial ...

    This command is used in conjunction with the ACTS modem driver (type 18) or the JJY driver (type 40, mode 100 - 180). @@ -3041,9 +3094,9 @@ one telephone number used to dial the telephone JJY service. The Hayes command ATDT is normally prepended to the number. The number can contain other modem control codes as well.

    -
    pollskewlist [poll early late] ... [default early late]
    +
    pollskewlist [poll early late] ... [default early late]

    Enable skewing of our poll requests to our servers. -poll +poll is a number between 3 and 17 inclusive, identifying a specific poll interval. A poll interval is 2^n seconds in duration, so a poll value of 3 corresponds to 8 seconds @@ -3059,119 +3112,119 @@ Ar late specifies how late the poll may be delayed. With no arguments, internally specified default values are chosen.

    -
    reset [allpeers] [auth] [ctl] [io] [mem] [sys] [timer]
    +
    reset [allpeers] [auth] [ctl] [io] [mem] [sys] [timer]

    Reset one or more groups of counters maintained by -ntpd +ntpd and exposed by -ntpq +ntpq and -ntpdc. +ntpdc.

    -
    rlimit [memlock Nmegabytes | stacksize N4kPages filenum Nfiledescriptors]
    -
    -
    memlock Nmegabytes
    +
    rlimit [memlock Nmegabytes | stacksize N4kPages filenum Nfiledescriptors]
    +
    +
    memlock Nmegabytes

    Specify the number of megabytes of memory that should be allocated and locked. Probably only available under Linux, this option may be useful when dropping root (the --i +-i option). The default is 32 megabytes on non-Linux machines, and -1 under Linux. -1 means "do not lock the process into memory". 0 means "lock whatever memory the process wants into memory".

    -
    stacksize N4kPages
    +
    stacksize N4kPages

    Specifies the maximum size of the process stack on systems with the -mlockall() +mlockall() function. Defaults to 50 4k pages (200 4k pages in OpenBSD).

    -
    filenum Nfiledescriptors
    +
    filenum Nfiledescriptors

    Specifies the maximum number of file descriptors ntpd may have open at once. Defaults to the system default.

    -
    saveconfigdir directory_path
    +
    saveconfigdir directory_path

    Specify the directory in which to write configuration snapshots requested with .Cm ntpq ’s -saveconfig +saveconfig command. If -saveconfigdir +saveconfigdir does not appear in the configuration file, -saveconfig +saveconfig requests are rejected by -ntpd. +ntpd.

    -
    saveconfig filename
    +
    saveconfig filename

    Write the current configuration, including any runtime modifications given with -:config +:config or -config-from-file +config-from-file to the -ntpd +ntpd host’s -filename +filename in the -saveconfigdir. +saveconfigdir. This command will be rejected unless the -saveconfigdir +saveconfigdir directive appears in .Cm ntpd ’s configuration file. -filename +filename can use -strftime(3) +strftime(3) format directives to substitute the current date and time, for example, -saveconfig\ ntp-%Y%m%d-%H%M%S.conf. +saveconfig\ ntp-%Y%m%d-%H%M%S.conf. The filename used is stored in the system variable -savedconfig. +savedconfig. Authentication is required.

    -
    setvar variable [default]
    +
    setvar variable [default]

    This command adds an additional system variable. These variables can be used to distribute additional information such as the access policy. If the variable of the form -name=value +name=value is followed by the -default +default keyword, the variable will be listed as part of the default system variables -(rv command)). +(rv command)). These additional variables serve informational purposes only. They are not related to the protocol other that they can be listed. The known protocol variables will always override any variables defined via the -setvar +setvar mechanism. There are three special variables that contain the names of all variable of the same group. The -sys_var_list +sys_var_list holds the names of all system variables. The -peer_var_list +peer_var_list holds the names of all peer variables and the -clock_var_list +clock_var_list holds the names of the reference clock variables.

    -
    sysinfo
    +
    sysinfo

    Display operational summary.

    -
    sysstats
    +
    sysstats

    Show statistics counters maintained in the protocol module.

    -
    tinker [allan allan | dispersion dispersion | freq freq | huffpuff huffpuff | panic panic | step step | stepback stepback | stepfwd stepfwd | stepout stepout]
    +
    tinker [allan allan | dispersion dispersion | freq freq | huffpuff huffpuff | panic panic | step step | stepback stepback | stepfwd stepfwd | stepout stepout]

    This command can be used to alter several system variables in very exceptional circumstances. It should occur in the @@ -3190,25 +3243,25 @@ Emphasis added: twisters are on their own and can expect no help from the support group.

    The variables operate as follows: -

    -
    allan allan
    +

    +
    allan allan

    The argument becomes the new value for the minimum Allan intercept, which is a parameter of the PLL/FLL clock discipline algorithm. The value in log2 seconds defaults to 7 (1024 s), which is also the lower limit.

    -
    dispersion dispersion
    +
    dispersion dispersion

    The argument becomes the new value for the dispersion increase rate, normally .000015 s/s.

    -
    freq freq
    +
    freq freq

    The argument becomes the initial value of the frequency offset in parts-per-million. This overrides the value in the frequency file, if present, and avoids the initial training state if it is not.

    -
    huffpuff huffpuff
    +
    huffpuff huffpuff

    The argument becomes the new value for the experimental huff-n’-puff filter span, which determines the most recent interval the algorithm will search for a minimum delay. @@ -3218,13 +3271,13 @@ There is no default, since the filter is not enabled unless this command is given.

    -
    panic panic
    +
    panic panic

    The argument is the panic threshold, normally 1000 s. If set to zero, the panic sanity check is disabled and a clock offset of any value will be accepted.

    -
    step step
    +
    step step

    The argument is the step threshold, which by default is 0.128 s. It can be set to any positive number in seconds. @@ -3234,7 +3287,7 @@ Note: The kernel time discipline is disabled if the step threshold is set to zero or greater than the default.

    -
    stepback stepback
    +
    stepback stepback

    The argument is the step threshold for the backward direction, which by default is 0.128 s. It can @@ -3246,10 +3299,10 @@ disabled if each direction of step threshold are either set to zero or greater than .5 second.

    -
    stepfwd stepfwd
    +
    stepfwd stepfwd

    As for stepback, but for the forward direction.

    -
    stepout stepout
    +
    stepout stepout

    The argument is the stepout timeout, which by default is 900 s. It can be set to any positive number in seconds. @@ -3258,20 +3311,20 @@ pulses will not be suppressed.

    -
    writevar assocID\ name = value [,...]
    +
    writevar assocID\ name = value [,...]

    Write (create or update) the specified variables. If the -assocID +assocID is zero, the variablea re from the system variables name space, otherwise they are from the peer variables name space. The -assocID +assocID is required, as the same name can occur in both name spaces.

    -
    trap host_address [port port_number] [interface interface_address]
    +
    trap host_address [port port_number] [interface interface_address]

    This command configures a trap receiver at the given host address and port number for sending messages with the specified local interface address. @@ -3283,11 +3336,11 @@ message is sent through. Note that on a multihomed host the interface used may vary from time to time with routing changes.

    -
    ttl hop ...
    +
    ttl hop ...

    This command specifies a list of TTL values in increasing order. Up to 8 values can be specified. In -manycast +manycast mode these values are used in-turn in an expanding-ring search. The default is eight multiples of 32 starting at 31.

    @@ -3298,7 +3351,7 @@ programs may also request their own trap dynamically, configuring a trap receiver will ensure that no messages are lost when the server is started.

    -
    hop ...
    +
    hop ...

    This command specifies a list of TTL values in increasing order, up to 8 values can be specified. In manycast mode these values are used in turn in @@ -3308,88 +3361,87 @@ The default is eight multiples of 32 starting at

    -

    This section was generated by AutoGen, -using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntp.conf program. +

    This section was generated by AutoGen, +using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntp.conf program. This software is released under the NTP license, <http://ntp.org/license>.

    - - - - - -
    -
    +
    +
    + -

    1.1.8 ntp.conf Files

    -
    -
    /etc/ntp.conf
    +

    1.1.8 ntp.conf Files

    +
    +
    /etc/ntp.conf

    the default name of the configuration file

    -
    ntp.keys
    +
    ntp.keys

    private MD5 keys

    -
    ntpkey
    +
    ntpkey

    RSA private key

    -
    ntpkey_host
    +
    ntpkey_host

    RSA public key

    -
    ntp_dh
    +
    ntp_dh

    Diffie-Hellman agreement parameters


    -
    +
    +
    + -

    1.1.9 ntp.conf See Also

    -

    ntpd(1ntpdmdoc), -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc), -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +

    1.1.9 ntp.conf See Also

    +

    ntpd(1ntpdmdoc), +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc), +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc)

    In addition to the manual pages provided, comprehensive documentation is available on the world wide web at -http://www.ntp.org/. +http://www.ntp.org/. A snapshot of this documentation is available in HTML format in -/usr/share/doc/ntp. +/usr/share/doc/ntp.


    -

    David L. Mills, Network Time Protocol (Version 4), RFC5905 +

    David L. Mills, Network Time Protocol (Version 4), RFC5905


    -
    +
    +
    + -

    1.1.10 ntp.conf Bugs

    +

    1.1.10 ntp.conf Bugs

    The syntax checking is not picky; some combinations of ridiculous and even hilarious options and modes may not be detected.

    The -ntpkey_host +ntpkey_host files are really digital certificates. These should be obtained via secure directory services when they become universally available.


    -
    -

    -  

    -

    1.1.11 ntp.conf Notes

    +
    + +

    1.1.11 ntp.conf Notes

    This document was derived from FreeBSD. -


    +

    +
    +
    +
    diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.conf.man.in b/ntpd/ntp.conf.man.in index 7d85e612e..49ee85b5a 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntp.conf.man.in +++ b/ntpd/ntp.conf.man.in @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntp.conf 5 "30 Sep 2023" "4.2.8p17" "File Formats" +.TH ntp.conf 5 "07 Jan 2024" "4.2.8p17" "File Formats" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed September 30, 2023 at 03:20:48 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:31 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntp.conf.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME @@ -3451,7 +3451,7 @@ RFC5905 .SH "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .SH "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .SH BUGS The syntax checking is not picky; some combinations of diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.conf.mdoc.in b/ntpd/ntp.conf.mdoc.in index 6b8b5e607..e0b5dce55 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntp.conf.mdoc.in +++ b/ntpd/ntp.conf.mdoc.in @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd September 30 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTP_CONF 5 File Formats .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed September 30, 2023 at 03:20:43 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:20 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntp.conf.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -3296,7 +3296,7 @@ A snapshot of this documentation is available in HTML format in .Sh "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .Sh "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .Sh BUGS The syntax checking is not picky; some combinations of diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.keys.5man b/ntpd/ntp.keys.5man index 24dbfcf03..13ee481a6 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntp.keys.5man +++ b/ntpd/ntp.keys.5man @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -.TH ntp.keys 5man "06 Jun 2023" "4.2.8p17" "File Formats" +.TH ntp.keys 5man "07 Jan 2024" "4.2.8p17" "File Formats" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp.man) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:37:47 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:33 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntp.keys.def .\" and the template file agman-file.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ the default name of the configuration file .SH "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .SH "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .SH "BUGS" Please send bug reports to: https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.keys.5mdoc b/ntpd/ntp.keys.5mdoc index 100320fd2..26fd7e066 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntp.keys.5mdoc +++ b/ntpd/ntp.keys.5mdoc @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTP_KEYS 5mdoc File Formats -.Os FreeBSD 12.1-RELEASE_SI +.Os FreeBSD 11.2-RELEASE_SI .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:37:34 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:22 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntp.keys.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-file.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ it to autogen\-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .Sh "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .Sh "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .Sh "BUGS" Please send bug reports to: https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.keys.html b/ntpd/ntp.keys.html index 2d53d91f4..42c013701 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntp.keys.html +++ b/ntpd/ntp.keys.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ - + - + NTP Symmetric Key @@ -10,24 +10,19 @@ + + + + @@ -35,63 +30,57 @@ ul.no-bullet {list-style: none} -

    NTP Symmetric Key

    -
    +
    + -

    NTP’s Symmetric Key File User Manual

    +

    NTP’s Symmetric Key File User Manual

    This document describes the symmetric key file for the NTP Project’s -ntpd program. +ntpd program.

    -

    This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntp.keys. +

    This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntp.keys.

    - + + +

    Short Table of Contents

    - - - - - - - +

    -
    +
    + -

    1 Description

    +

    1 Description

    -

    The name and location of the symmetric key file for ntpd can -be specified in a configuration file, by default /etc/ntp.keys. +

    The name and location of the symmetric key file for ntpd can +be specified in a configuration file, by default /etc/ntp.keys.

    - - - - +
    -
    +
    + -

    1.1 Notes about ntp.keys

    - - +

    1.1 Notes about ntp.keys

    + + @@ -99,14 +88,14 @@ Previous:

    -
    +
    + -

    1.1.1 ntp.keys Files

    -
    -
    /etc/ntp.keys
    +

    1.1.1 ntp.keys Files

    +
    +
    /etc/ntp.keys

    the default name of the configuration file


    -
    +
    +
    + -

    1.1.2 ntp.keys See Also

    -

    ntp.conf(5), -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc), -ntpdate(1ntpdatemdoc), -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc), -sntp(1sntpmdoc) +

    1.1.2 ntp.keys See Also

    +

    ntp.conf(5), +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc), +ntpdate(1ntpdatemdoc), +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc), +sntp(1sntpmdoc)


    -
    -

    -  

    -

    1.1.3 ntp.keys Notes

    +
    + +

    1.1.3 ntp.keys Notes

    This document was derived from FreeBSD. -


    +

    +
    +
    +
    diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.keys.man.in b/ntpd/ntp.keys.man.in index c646bb11e..0690c6789 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntp.keys.man.in +++ b/ntpd/ntp.keys.man.in @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -.TH ntp.keys 5 "06 Jun 2023" "4.2.8p17" "File Formats" +.TH ntp.keys 5 "07 Jan 2024" "4.2.8p17" "File Formats" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp.man) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:37:47 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:33 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntp.keys.def .\" and the template file agman-file.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ the default name of the configuration file .SH "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .SH "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .SH "BUGS" Please send bug reports to: https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org diff --git a/ntpd/ntp.keys.mdoc.in b/ntpd/ntp.keys.mdoc.in index fdeaeba4c..09ed8cdf3 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntp.keys.mdoc.in +++ b/ntpd/ntp.keys.mdoc.in @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTP_KEYS 5 File Formats -.Os FreeBSD 12.1-RELEASE_SI +.Os FreeBSD 11.2-RELEASE_SI .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:37:34 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:22 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntp.keys.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-file.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ it to autogen\-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .Sh "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .Sh "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .Sh "BUGS" Please send bug reports to: https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org diff --git a/ntpd/ntpd-opts.c b/ntpd/ntpd-opts.c index 14774d684..4a58c936e 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntpd-opts.c +++ b/ntpd/ntpd-opts.c @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* * EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpd-opts.c) * - * It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:36:50 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 + * It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:33:48 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 * From the definitions ntpd-opts.def * and the template file options * @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ * The ntpd program is copyrighted and licensed * under the following terms: * - * Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. + * Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. * This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and * redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which * can be seen at: @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ extern FILE * option_usage_fp; */ static char const ntpd_opt_strs[3133] = /* 0 */ "ntpd 4.2.8p17\n" - "Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n" + "Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n" "This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n" "redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n" "can be seen at:\n" @@ -1535,7 +1535,7 @@ static void bogus_function(void) { */ /* referenced via ntpdOptions.pzCopyright */ puts(_("ntpd 4.2.8p17\n\ -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\ +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\ This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n\ redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n\ can be seen at:\n")); diff --git a/ntpd/ntpd-opts.h b/ntpd/ntpd-opts.h index 3541255bb..5df035a40 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntpd-opts.h +++ b/ntpd/ntpd-opts.h @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* * EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpd-opts.h) * - * It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:36:50 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 + * It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:33:48 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 * From the definitions ntpd-opts.def * and the template file options * @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ * The ntpd program is copyrighted and licensed * under the following terms: * - * Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. + * Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. * This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and * redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which * can be seen at: diff --git a/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdman b/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdman index 237a9179f..54491b941 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdman +++ b/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdman @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntpd 1ntpdman "06 Jun 2023" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" +.TH ntpd 1ntpdman "07 Jan 2024" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:37:49 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:34 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpd-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME @@ -979,7 +979,7 @@ RFC5908 .SH "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .SH "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .SH BUGS The diff --git a/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdmdoc b/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdmdoc index 536e7f672..34b32f98e 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdmdoc +++ b/ntpd/ntpd.1ntpdmdoc @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTPD 1ntpdmdoc User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpd-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:37:36 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:23 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpd-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -886,7 +886,7 @@ A snapshot of this documentation is available in HTML format in .Sh "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .Sh "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .Sh BUGS The diff --git a/ntpd/ntpd.html b/ntpd/ntpd.html index 3947f57f1..c2e5f7dc6 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntpd.html +++ b/ntpd/ntpd.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ - + - + ntpd: Network Time Protocol (NTP) Daemon User’s Manual @@ -10,24 +10,20 @@ + + + + @@ -35,19 +31,19 @@ ul.no-bullet {list-style: none} -

    ntpd: Network Time Protocol (NTP) Daemon User’s Manual

    -
    +
    + -

    ntpd: Network Time Protocol (NTP) Daemon User Manual

    +

    ntpd: Network Time Protocol (NTP) Daemon User Manual

    -

    The ntpd program is an operating system daemon that synchronizes the +

    The ntpd program is an operating system daemon that synchronizes the system clock to remote NTP time servers or local reference clocks. It is a complete implementation of NTP version 4 defined by RFC-5905, but also retains compatible with version 3 defined by RFC-1305 and versions @@ -56,35 +52,28 @@ The program can operate in any of several modes, including client/server, symmetric and broadcast modes, and with both symmetric-key and public-key cryptography.

    -

    This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntpd. +

    This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntpd.

    - + + +

    Short Table of Contents

    - - - - - - - - +

    -
    +
    + -

    1 Description

    +

    1 Description

    -

    The ntpd program ordinarily requires +

    The ntpd program ordinarily requires a configuration file described at ‘ntp.conf’. This configuration file contains configuration commands described on the pages listed above. @@ -93,38 +82,36 @@ automatically. This makes it possible to deploy a fleet of workstations without specifying configuration details specific to the local environment.

    -

    The ntpd program normally operates continuously while adjusting the +

    The ntpd program normally operates continuously while adjusting the system time and frequency, but in some cases this might not be practical. -With the -q option ntpd operates as in continuous mode, but +With the -q option ntpd operates as in continuous mode, but exits just after setting the clock for the first time. -Most applications will probably want to specify the iburst -option with the server command. +Most applications will probably want to specify the iburst +option with the server command. With this option an initial volley of messages is exchanged to groom the data and set the clock in about ten seconds’ time. If nothing is heard after a few minutes’ time, the daemon times out and exits without setting the clock.

    - - - - - +
    -
    +
    + -

    1.1 Invoking ntpd

    - - +

    1.1 Invoking ntpd

    + +

    The -ntpd +ntpd utility is an operating system daemon which sets and maintains the system time of day in synchronism with Internet standard time servers. @@ -135,7 +122,7 @@ version 3, as defined by RFC-1305, and versions 1 and 2, as defined by RFC-1059 and RFC-1119, respectively.

    The -ntpd +ntpd utility does most computations in 64-bit floating point arithmetic and does relatively clumsy 64-bit fixed point operations only when necessary to preserve the ultimate precision, about 232 @@ -145,9 +132,9 @@ ordinary workstations and networks of today, it may be required with future gigahertz CPU clocks and gigabit LANs.

    Ordinarily, -ntpd +ntpd reads the -ntp.conf(5) +ntp.conf(5) configuration file at startup time in order to determine the synchronization sources and operating modes. It is also possible to @@ -159,140 +146,104 @@ broadcast/multicast client, with all peers being determined by listening to broadcasts at run time.

    If NetInfo support is built into -ntpd +ntpd then -ntpd +ntpd will attempt to read its configuration from the NetInfo if the default -ntp.conf(5) +ntp.conf(5) file cannot be read and no file is specified by the --c +-c option.

    Various internal -ntpd +ntpd variables can be displayed and configuration options altered while the -ntpd +ntpd is running using the -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) utility programs.

    When -ntpd +ntpd starts it looks at the value of -umask(2), +umask(2), and if zero -ntpd +ntpd will set the -umask(2) +umask(2) to 022.

    -

    This section was generated by AutoGen, -using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntpd program. +

    This section was generated by AutoGen, +using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntpd program. This software is released under the NTP license, <http://ntp.org/license>.

    - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +
    -
    +
    + -

    1.1.1 ntpd help/usage (--help)

    - +

    1.1.1 ntpd help/usage (--help)

    +

    This is the automatically generated usage text for ntpd.

    -

    The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option -(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print +

    The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option +(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. -more-help is disabled on platforms without a working -fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is -used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit +more-help is disabled on platforms without a working +fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is +used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

    -
    ntpd - NTP daemon program - Ver. 4.2.8p17
    +
    ntpd - NTP daemon program - Ver. 4.2.8p17
     Usage:  ntpd [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... \
                     [ <server1> ... <serverN> ]
       Flg Arg Option-Name    Description
    @@ -364,54 +315,60 @@ Please send bug reports to:  <https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org>
     

    -
    +
    +
    + -

    1.1.2 ipv4 option (-4)

    - +

    1.1.2 ipv4 option (-4)

    +

    This is the “force ipv4 dns name resolution” option.

    This option has some usage constraints. It: -

      -
    • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

        +
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: ipv6.

      Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line to the IPv4 namespace.


      -
      +
      +
      + -

      1.1.3 ipv6 option (-6)

      - +

      1.1.3 ipv6 option (-6)

      +

      This is the “force ipv6 dns name resolution” option.

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

          +
        • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: ipv4.

        Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line to the IPv6 namespace.


        -
        +
        +
        + -

        1.1.4 authreq option (-a)

        - +

        1.1.4 authreq option (-a)

        +

        This is the “require crypto authentication” option.

        This option has some usage constraints. It: -

          -
        • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

            +
          • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: authnoreq.
          @@ -419,18 +376,20 @@ authnoreq. multicast client and symmetric passive associations. This is the default.


          -
          +
          +
          + -

          1.1.5 authnoreq option (-A)

          - +

          1.1.5 authnoreq option (-A)

          +

          This is the “do not require crypto authentication” option.

          This option has some usage constraints. It: -

            -
          • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

              +
            • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: authreq.
            @@ -438,74 +397,82 @@ authreq. multicast client and symmetric passive associations. This is almost never a good idea.


            -
            +
            +
            + -

            1.1.6 configfile option (-c)

            - +

            1.1.6 configfile option (-c)

            +

            This is the “configuration file name” option. This option takes a string argument. The name and path of the configuration file, -/etc/ntp.conf +/etc/ntp.conf by default.


            -
            +
            +
            + -

            1.1.7 driftfile option (-f)

            - +

            1.1.7 driftfile option (-f)

            +

            This is the “frequency drift file name” option. This option takes a string argument. The name and path of the frequency file, -/etc/ntp.drift +/etc/ntp.drift by default. This is the same operation as the -driftfile driftfile +driftfile driftfile configuration specification in the -/etc/ntp.conf +/etc/ntp.conf file.


            -
            +
            +
            + -

            1.1.8 panicgate option (-g)

            - +

            1.1.8 panicgate option (-g)

            +

            This is the “allow the first adjustment to be big” option.

            This option has some usage constraints. It: -

              -
            • may appear an unlimited number of times. +

                +
              • may appear an unlimited number of times.

              Normally, -ntpd +ntpd exits with a message to the system log if the offset exceeds the panic threshold, which is 1000 s by default. This option allows the time to be set to any value without restriction; however, this can happen only once. If the threshold is exceeded after that, -ntpd +ntpd will exit with a message to the system log. This option can be used with the --q +-q and --x +-x options. See the -tinker +tinker configuration file directive for other options.


              -
              +
              +
              + -

              1.1.9 force-step-once option (-G)

              - +

              1.1.9 force-step-once option (-G)

              +

              This is the “step any initial offset correction.” option. Normally, -ntpd +ntpd steps the time if the time offset exceeds the step threshold, which is 128 ms by default, and otherwise slews the time. This option forces the initial offset correction to be stepped, @@ -513,280 +480,312 @@ so the highest time accuracy can be achieved quickly. However, this may also cause the time to be stepped back so this option must not be used if applications requiring monotonic time are running. -See the tinker configuration file directive for other options. +See the tinker configuration file directive for other options.


              -
              +
              +
              + -

              1.1.10 jaildir option (-i)

              - +

              1.1.10 jaildir option (-i)

              +

              This is the “jail directory” option. This option takes a string argument.

              This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                -
              • must be compiled in by defining HAVE_DROPROOT during the compilation. +

                  +
                • must be compiled in by defining HAVE_DROPROOT during the compilation.

                Chroot the server to the directory -jaildir +jaildir . This option also implies that the server attempts to drop root privileges at startup. You may need to also specify a --u +-u option. This option is only available if the OS supports adjusting the clock without full root privileges. This option is supported under NetBSD (configure with ---enable-clockctl) or Linux (configure with ---enable-linuxcaps) or Solaris (configure with --enable-solarisprivs). +--enable-clockctl) or Linux (configure with +--enable-linuxcaps) or Solaris (configure with --enable-solarisprivs).


                -
                +
                +
                + -

                1.1.11 interface option (-I)

                - +

                1.1.11 interface option (-I)

                +

                This is the “listen on an interface name or address” option. -This option takes a string argument iface. +This option takes a string argument iface.

                This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                  -
                • may appear an unlimited number of times. +

                    +
                  • may appear an unlimited number of times.

                  Open the network address given, or all the addresses associated with the given interface name. This option may appear multiple times. This option also implies not opening other addresses, except wildcard and localhost. This option is deprecated. Please consider using the configuration file -interface command, which is more versatile. +interface command, which is more versatile.


                  -
                  +
                  +
                  + -

                  1.1.12 keyfile option (-k)

                  - +

                  1.1.12 keyfile option (-k)

                  +

                  This is the “path to symmetric keys” option. This option takes a string argument. Specify the name and path of the symmetric key file. -/etc/ntp.keys +/etc/ntp.keys is the default. This is the same operation as the -keys keyfile +keys keyfile configuration file directive.


                  -
                  +
                  +
                  + -

                  1.1.13 logfile option (-l)

                  - +

                  1.1.13 logfile option (-l)

                  +

                  This is the “path to the log file” option. This option takes a string argument. Specify the name and path of the log file. The default is the system log file. This is the same operation as the -logfile logfile +logfile logfile configuration file directive.


                  -
                  +
                  +
                  + -

                  1.1.14 novirtualips option (-L)

                  - +

                  1.1.14 novirtualips option (-L)

                  +

                  This is the “do not listen to virtual interfaces” option. Do not listen to virtual interfaces, defined as those with names containing a colon. This option is deprecated. Please -consider using the configuration file interface command, which +consider using the configuration file interface command, which is more versatile.


                  -
                  +
                  +
                  + -

                  1.1.15 modifymmtimer option (-M)

                  - +

                  1.1.15 modifymmtimer option (-M)

                  +

                  This is the “modify multimedia timer (windows only)” option.

                  This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                    -
                  • must be compiled in by defining SYS_WINNT during the compilation. +

                      +
                    • must be compiled in by defining SYS_WINNT during the compilation.

                    Set the Windows Multimedia Timer to highest resolution. This ensures the resolution does not change while ntpd is running, avoiding timekeeping glitches associated with changes.


                    -
                    +
                    +
                    + -

                    1.1.16 nice option (-N)

                    - +

                    1.1.16 nice option (-N)

                    +

                    This is the “run at high priority” option. To the extent permitted by the operating system, run -ntpd +ntpd at the highest priority.


                    -
                    +
                    +
                    + -

                    1.1.17 pidfile option (-p)

                    - +

                    1.1.17 pidfile option (-p)

                    +

                    This is the “path to the pid file” option. This option takes a string argument. Specify the name and path of the file used to record -ntpd’s +ntpd’s process ID. This is the same operation as the -pidfile pidfile +pidfile pidfile configuration file directive.


                    -
                    +
                    +
                    + -

                    1.1.18 priority option (-P)

                    - +

                    1.1.18 priority option (-P)

                    +

                    This is the “process priority” option. This option takes a number argument. To the extent permitted by the operating system, run -ntpd +ntpd at the specified -sched_setscheduler(SCHED_FIFO) +sched_setscheduler(SCHED_FIFO) priority.


                    -
                    +
                    +
                    + -

                    1.1.19 quit option (-q)

                    - +

                    1.1.19 quit option (-q)

                    +

                    This is the “set the time and quit” option.

                    This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                      -
                    • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                        +
                      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: saveconfigquit, wait-sync.
                      -

                      ntpd +

                      ntpd will not daemonize and will exit after the clock is first synchronized. This behavior mimics that of the -ntpdate +ntpdate program, which will soon be replaced with a shell script. The --g +-g and --x +-x options can be used with this option. Note: The kernel time discipline is disabled with this option.


                      -
                      +
                      +
                      + -

                      1.1.20 propagationdelay option (-r)

                      - +

                      1.1.20 propagationdelay option (-r)

                      +

                      This is the “broadcast/propagation delay” option. This option takes a string argument. Specify the default propagation delay from the broadcast/multicast server to this client. This is necessary only if the delay cannot be computed automatically by the protocol.


                      -
                      +
                      +
                      + -

                      1.1.21 saveconfigquit option

                      - +

                      1.1.21 saveconfigquit option

                      +

                      This is the “save parsed configuration and quit” option. This option takes a string argument.

                      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                        -
                      • must be compiled in by defining SAVECONFIG during the compilation. -
                      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                          +
                        • must be compiled in by defining SAVECONFIG during the compilation. +
                        • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: quit, wait-sync.
                        -

                        Cause ntpd to parse its startup configuration file and save an +

                        Cause ntpd to parse its startup configuration file and save an equivalent to the given filename and exit. This option was designed for automated testing.


                        -
                        +
                        +
                        + -

                        1.1.22 statsdir option (-s)

                        - +

                        1.1.22 statsdir option (-s)

                        +

                        This is the “statistics file location” option. This option takes a string argument. Specify the directory path for files created by the statistics facility. This is the same operation as the -statsdir statsdir +statsdir statsdir configuration file directive.


                        -
                        +
                        +
                        + -

                        1.1.23 trustedkey option (-t)

                        - +

                        1.1.23 trustedkey option (-t)

                        +

                        This is the “trusted key number” option. -This option takes a string argument tkey. +This option takes a string argument tkey.

                        This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                          -
                        • may appear an unlimited number of times. +

                            +
                          • may appear an unlimited number of times.

                          Add the specified key number to the trusted key list.


                          -
                          +
                          +
                          + -

                          1.1.24 user option (-u)

                          - +

                          1.1.24 user option (-u)

                          +

                          This is the “run as userid (or userid:groupid)” option. This option takes a string argument.

                          This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                            -
                          • must be compiled in by defining HAVE_DROPROOT during the compilation. +

                              +
                            • must be compiled in by defining HAVE_DROPROOT during the compilation.

                            Specify a user, and optionally a group, to switch to. This option is only available if the OS supports adjusting the clock without full root privileges. This option is supported under NetBSD (configure with ---enable-clockctl) or Linux (configure with ---enable-linuxcaps) or Solaris (configure with --enable-solarisprivs). +--enable-clockctl) or Linux (configure with +--enable-linuxcaps) or Solaris (configure with --enable-solarisprivs).


                            -
                            +
                            +
                            + -

                            1.1.25 updateinterval option (-U)

                            - +

                            1.1.25 updateinterval option (-U)

                            +

                            This is the “interval in seconds between scans for new or dropped interfaces” option. This option takes a number argument. @@ -795,38 +794,42 @@ For systems with routing socket support the scans will be performed shortly afte has been detected by the system. Use 0 to disable scanning. 60 seconds is the minimum time between scans.


                            -
                            +
                            +
                            + -

                            1.1.26 wait-sync option (-w)

                            - +

                            1.1.26 wait-sync option (-w)

                            +

                            This is the “seconds to wait for first clock sync” option. This option takes a number argument.

                            This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                              -
                            • must be compiled in by defining HAVE_WORKING_FORK during the compilation. -
                            • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                                +
                              • must be compiled in by defining HAVE_WORKING_FORK during the compilation. +
                              • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: nofork, quit, saveconfigquit.
                              -

                              If greater than zero, alters ntpd’s behavior when forking to +

                              If greater than zero, alters ntpd’s behavior when forking to daemonize. Instead of exiting with status 0 immediately after the fork, the parent waits up to the specified number of seconds for the child to first synchronize the clock. The exit status is zero (success) if the clock was synchronized, -otherwise it is ETIMEDOUT. -This provides the option for a script starting ntpd to easily +otherwise it is ETIMEDOUT. +This provides the option for a script starting ntpd to easily wait for the first set of the clock before proceeding.


                              -
                              +
                              +
                              + -

                              1.1.27 slew option (-x)

                              - +

                              1.1.27 slew option (-x)

                              +

                              This is the “slew up to 600 seconds” option. Normally, the time is slewed if the offset is less than the step threshold, which is 128 ms by default, and stepped if above the threshold. @@ -834,65 +837,71 @@ This option sets the threshold to 600 s, which is well within the accuracy windo Note: Since the slew rate of typical Unix kernels is limited to 0.5 ms/s, each second of adjustment requires an amortization interval of 2000 s. Thus, an adjustment as much as 600 s will take almost 14 days to complete. This option can be used with the --g +-g and --q +-q options. See the -tinker +tinker configuration file directive for other options. Note: The kernel time discipline is disabled with this option.


                              -
                              +
                              +
                              + -

                              1.1.28 usepcc option

                              - +

                              1.1.28 usepcc option

                              +

                              This is the “use cpu cycle counter (windows only)” option.

                              This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                -
                              • must be compiled in by defining SYS_WINNT during the compilation. +

                                  +
                                • must be compiled in by defining SYS_WINNT during the compilation.
                                -

                                Attempt to substitute the CPU counter for QueryPerformanceCounter. -The CPU counter and QueryPerformanceCounter are compared, and if +

                                Attempt to substitute the CPU counter for QueryPerformanceCounter. +The CPU counter and QueryPerformanceCounter are compared, and if they have the same frequency, the CPU counter (RDTSC on x86) is used directly, saving the overhead of a system call.


                                -
                                +
                                +
                                + -

                                1.1.29 pccfreq option

                                - +

                                1.1.29 pccfreq option

                                +

                                This is the “force cpu cycle counter use (windows only)” option. This option takes a string argument.

                                This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                  -
                                • must be compiled in by defining SYS_WINNT during the compilation. +

                                    +
                                  • must be compiled in by defining SYS_WINNT during the compilation.
                                  -

                                  Force substitution the CPU counter for QueryPerformanceCounter. +

                                  Force substitution the CPU counter for QueryPerformanceCounter. The CPU counter (RDTSC on x86) is used unconditionally with the given frequency (in Hz).


                                  -
                                  +
                                  +
                                  + -

                                  1.1.30 mdns option (-m)

                                  - +

                                  1.1.30 mdns option (-m)

                                  +

                                  This is the “register with mdns as a ntp server” option.

                                  This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                    -
                                  • must be compiled in by defining HAVE_DNSREGISTRATION during the compilation. +

                                      +
                                    • must be compiled in by defining HAVE_DNSREGISTRATION during the compilation.

                                    Registers as an NTP server with the local mDNS server which allows @@ -900,107 +909,127 @@ the server to be discovered via mDNS client lookup.


                                    -
                                    +
                                    +
                                    + -

                                    1.1.31 presetting/configuring ntpd

                                    +

                                    1.1.31 presetting/configuring ntpd

                                    -

                                    Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by -loading values from environment variables named NTPD and NTPD_<OPTION_NAME>. <OPTION_NAME> must be one of +

                                    Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by +loading values from environment variables named NTPD and NTPD_<OPTION_NAME>. <OPTION_NAME> must be one of the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores. -The NTPD variable will be tokenized and parsed like +The NTPD variable will be tokenized and parsed like the command line. The remaining variables are tested for existence and their values are treated like option arguments.

                                    The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are:

                                    -

                                    version (-)

                                    +

                                    version (-)

                                    Print the program version to standard out, optionally with licensing information, then exit 0. The optional argument specifies how much licensing detail to provide. The default is to print just the version. The licensing information may be selected with an option argument. Only the first letter of the argument is examined:

                                    -
                                    -
                                    version
                                    +
                                    +
                                    version

                                    Only print the version. This is the default.

                                    -
                                    copyright
                                    +
                                    copyright

                                    Name the copyright usage licensing terms.

                                    -
                                    verbose
                                    +
                                    verbose

                                    Print the full copyright usage licensing terms.


                                    -
                                    +
                                    +
                                    + -

                                    1.1.32 ntpd exit status

                                    +

                                    1.1.32 ntpd exit status

                                    One of the following exit values will be returned: -

                                    -
                                    0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
                                    +

                                    +
                                    0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

                                    Successful program execution.

                                    -
                                    1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
                                    +
                                    1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

                                    The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.


                                    -
                                    +
                                    +
                                    + -

                                    1.1.33 ntpd Usage

                                    +

                                    1.1.33 ntpd Usage


                                    -
                                    +
                                    +
                                    + -

                                    1.1.34 ntpd Files

                                    +

                                    1.1.34 ntpd Files


                                    -
                                    +
                                    +
                                    + -

                                    1.1.35 ntpd See Also

                                    +

                                    1.1.35 ntpd See Also


                                    -
                                    +
                                    +
                                    + -

                                    1.1.36 ntpd Bugs

                                    +

                                    1.1.36 ntpd Bugs


                                    -
                                    +
                                    +
                                    + -

                                    1.1.37 ntpd Notes

                                    +

                                    1.1.37 ntpd Notes


                                    -
                                    +
                                    +
                                    +
                                    + -

                                    1.2 Usage

                                    +

                                    1.2 Usage

                                    - +
                                    - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + +
                                    WhatDefaultFlagOption
                                    configuration file/etc/ntp.conf-cconffile
                                    frequency filenone-fdriftfile
                                    leapseconds filenoneleapfile
                                    process ID filenone-ppidfile
                                    log filesystem log-llogfile
                                    include filenonenoneincludefile
                                    statistics path/var/NTP-sstatsdir
                                    keys path/usr/local/etc-kkeysdir
                                    configuration file/etc/ntp.conf-cconffile
                                    frequency filenone-fdriftfile
                                    leapseconds filenoneleapfile
                                    process ID filenone-ppidfile
                                    log filesystem log-llogfile
                                    include filenonenoneincludefile
                                    statistics path/var/NTP-sstatsdir
                                    keys path/usr/local/etc-kkeysdir
                                    -
                                    +
                                    +
                                    +
                                    diff --git a/ntpd/ntpd.man.in b/ntpd/ntpd.man.in index addee5d56..0571eb398 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntpd.man.in +++ b/ntpd/ntpd.man.in @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntpd @NTPD_MS@ "06 Jun 2023" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" +.TH ntpd @NTPD_MS@ "07 Jan 2024" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:37:49 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:34 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpd-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME @@ -979,7 +979,7 @@ RFC5908 .SH "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .SH "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .SH BUGS The diff --git a/ntpd/ntpd.mdoc.in b/ntpd/ntpd.mdoc.in index 6d99fbcf5..bada4d1ff 100644 --- a/ntpd/ntpd.mdoc.in +++ b/ntpd/ntpd.mdoc.in @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTPD @NTPD_MS@ User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpd-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:37:36 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:23 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpd-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -886,7 +886,7 @@ A snapshot of this documentation is available in HTML format in .Sh "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .Sh "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .Sh BUGS The diff --git a/ntpdc/invoke-ntpdc.texi b/ntpdc/invoke-ntpdc.texi index 30b4a66d6..cbe82faf2 100644 --- a/ntpdc/invoke-ntpdc.texi +++ b/ntpdc/invoke-ntpdc.texi @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ # # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (invoke-ntpdc.texi) # -# It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:37:59 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +# It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:42 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 # From the definitions ntpdc-opts.def # and the template file agtexi-cmd.tpl @end ignore diff --git a/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.c b/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.c index 536d1b970..e025300d7 100644 --- a/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.c +++ b/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.c @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* * EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpdc-opts.c) * - * It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:37:53 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 + * It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:35:52 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 * From the definitions ntpdc-opts.def * and the template file options * @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ * The ntpdc program is copyrighted and licensed * under the following terms: * - * Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. + * Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. * This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and * redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which * can be seen at: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ extern FILE * option_usage_fp; */ static char const ntpdc_opt_strs[2005] = /* 0 */ "ntpdc 4.2.8p17\n" - "Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n" + "Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n" "This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n" "redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n" "can be seen at:\n" @@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ static void bogus_function(void) { */ /* referenced via ntpdcOptions.pzCopyright */ puts(_("ntpdc 4.2.8p17\n\ -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\ +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\ This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n\ redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n\ can be seen at:\n")); diff --git a/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.h b/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.h index 47d3f481a..37b0b596c 100644 --- a/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.h +++ b/ntpdc/ntpdc-opts.h @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* * EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpdc-opts.h) * - * It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:37:52 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 + * It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:35:51 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 * From the definitions ntpdc-opts.def * and the template file options * @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ * The ntpdc program is copyrighted and licensed * under the following terms: * - * Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. + * Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. * This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and * redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which * can be seen at: diff --git a/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcman b/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcman index f101aadac..5276dc16f 100644 --- a/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcman +++ b/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcman @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntpdc 1ntpdcman "06 Jun 2023" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" +.TH ntpdc 1ntpdcman "07 Jan 2024" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:01 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:44 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpdc-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME @@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ RFC1305 .SH AUTHORS The formatting directives in this document came from FreeBSD. .SH "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .SH BUGS The diff --git a/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcmdoc b/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcmdoc index 376443dae..b59935c91 100644 --- a/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcmdoc +++ b/ntpdc/ntpdc.1ntpdcmdoc @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTPDC 1ntpdcmdoc User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpdc-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:37:57 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:40 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpdc-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -792,7 +792,7 @@ it to autogen\-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .Sh AUTHORS The formatting directives in this document came from FreeBSD. .Sh "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .Sh BUGS The diff --git a/ntpdc/ntpdc.html b/ntpdc/ntpdc.html index 1a566baca..c840eaacb 100644 --- a/ntpdc/ntpdc.html +++ b/ntpdc/ntpdc.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ - + - + ntpdc: NTPD Control User’s Manual @@ -10,24 +10,19 @@ + + + + @@ -35,60 +30,53 @@ ul.no-bullet {list-style: none} -

                                    ntpdc: NTPD Control User’s Manual

                                    -
                                    +
                                    + -

                                    ntpdc: NTPD Control User Manual

                                    +

                                    ntpdc: NTPD Control User Manual

                                    -

                                    This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s ntpdc program, +

                                    This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s ntpdc program, that can be used to query a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server and display the time offset of the system clock relative to the server clock. Run as root, it can correct the system clock to this offset as well. It can be run as an interactive command or from a cron job.

                                    -

                                    This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntpdc. +

                                    This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntpdc.

                                    The program implements the SNTP protocol as defined by RFC 5905, the NTPv4 IETF specification.

                                    - + + +

                                    Short Table of Contents

                                    - - - - - - - - +

                                    -
                                    +
                                    + -

                                    1 Description

                                    +

                                    1 Description

                                    -

                                    By default, ntpdc writes the local data and time (i.e., not UTC) to the +

                                    By default, ntpdc writes the local data and time (i.e., not UTC) to the standard output in the format:

                                    -
                                    1996-10-15 20:17:25.123 (+0800) +4.567 +/- 0.089 secs
                                    +
                                    1996-10-15 20:17:25.123 (+0800) +4.567 +/- 0.089 secs
                                     

                                    where @@ -98,34 +86,32 @@ and the +4.567 +/- 0.089 secs indicates the time offset and error bound of the system clock relative to the server clock.

                                    - - - - - +
                                    -
                                    +
                                    + -

                                    1.1 Invoking ntpdc

                                    - - +

                                    1.1 Invoking ntpdc

                                    + + -

                                    ntpdc +

                                    ntpdc is deprecated. Please use -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) instead - it can do everything -ntpdc +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) instead - it can do everything +ntpdc used to do, and it does so using a much more sane interface.

                                    -

                                    ntpdc +

                                    ntpdc is a utility program used to query -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) about its current state and to request changes in that state. It uses NTP mode 7 control message formats described in the source code. @@ -134,72 +120,57 @@ be run either in interactive mode or controlled using command line arguments. Extensive state and statistics information is available through the -ntpdc +ntpdc interface. In addition, nearly all the configuration options which can be specified at startup using ntpd’s configuration file may also be specified at run time using -ntpdc +ntpdc

                                    -

                                    This section was generated by AutoGen, -using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntpdc program. +

                                    This section was generated by AutoGen, +using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntpdc program. This software is released under the NTP license, <http://ntp.org/license>.

                                    - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +
                                    -
                                    +
                                    + -

                                    1.1.1 ntpdc help/usage (--help)

                                    - +

                                    1.1.1 ntpdc help/usage (--help)

                                    +

                                    This is the automatically generated usage text for ntpdc.

                                    -

                                    The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option -(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print +

                                    The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option +(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. -more-help is disabled on platforms without a working -fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is -used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit +more-help is disabled on platforms without a working +fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is +used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

                                    -
                                    ntpdc - vendor-specific NTPD control program - Ver. 4.2.8p17
                                    +
                                    ntpdc - vendor-specific NTPD control program - Ver. 4.2.8p17
                                     Usage:  ntpdc [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... [ host ...]
                                       Flg Arg Option-Name    Description
                                        -4 no  ipv4           Force IPv4 DNS name resolution
                                    @@ -247,150 +218,168 @@ Please send bug reports to:  <https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org>
                                     

                                    -
                                    +
                                    +
                                    + -

                                    1.1.2 ipv4 option (-4)

                                    - +

                                    1.1.2 ipv4 option (-4)

                                    +

                                    This is the “force ipv4 dns name resolution” option.

                                    This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                      -
                                    • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                                        +
                                      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: ipv6.

                                      Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line to the IPv4 namespace.


                                      -
                                      +
                                      +
                                      + -

                                      1.1.3 ipv6 option (-6)

                                      - +

                                      1.1.3 ipv6 option (-6)

                                      +

                                      This is the “force ipv6 dns name resolution” option.

                                      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                        -
                                      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                                          +
                                        • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: ipv4.

                                        Force DNS resolution of following host names on the command line to the IPv6 namespace.


                                        -
                                        +
                                        +
                                        + -

                                        1.1.4 command option (-c)

                                        - +

                                        1.1.4 command option (-c)

                                        +

                                        This is the “run a command and exit” option. -This option takes a string argument cmd. +This option takes a string argument cmd.

                                        This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                          -
                                        • may appear an unlimited number of times. +

                                            +
                                          • may appear an unlimited number of times.

                                          The following argument is interpreted as an interactive format command and is added to the list of commands to be executed on the specified host(s).


                                          -
                                          +
                                          +
                                          + -

                                          1.1.5 interactive option (-i)

                                          - +

                                          1.1.5 interactive option (-i)

                                          +

                                          This is the “force ntpq to operate in interactive mode” option.

                                          This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                            -
                                          • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                                              +
                                            • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: command, listpeers, peers, showpeers.

                                            Force ntpq to operate in interactive mode. Prompts will be written to the standard output and commands read from the standard input.


                                            -
                                            +
                                            +
                                            + -

                                            1.1.6 listpeers option (-l)

                                            - +

                                            1.1.6 listpeers option (-l)

                                            +

                                            This is the “print a list of the peers” option.

                                            This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                              -
                                            • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                                                +
                                              • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: command.

                                              Print a list of the peers known to the server as well as a summary of their state. This is equivalent to the ’listpeers’ interactive command.


                                              -
                                              +
                                              +
                                              + -

                                              1.1.7 numeric option (-n)

                                              - +

                                              1.1.7 numeric option (-n)

                                              +

                                              This is the “numeric host addresses” option. Output all host addresses in dotted-quad numeric format rather than converting to the canonical host names.


                                              -
                                              +
                                              +
                                              + -

                                              1.1.8 peers option (-p)

                                              - +

                                              1.1.8 peers option (-p)

                                              +

                                              This is the “print a list of the peers” option.

                                              This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                                -
                                              • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                                                  +
                                                • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: command.

                                                Print a list of the peers known to the server as well as a summary of their state. This is equivalent to the ’peers’ interactive command.


                                                -
                                                +
                                                +
                                                + -

                                                1.1.9 showpeers option (-s)

                                                - +

                                                1.1.9 showpeers option (-s)

                                                +

                                                This is the “show a list of the peers” option.

                                                This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                                  -
                                                • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                                                    +
                                                  • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: command.

                                                  Print a list of the peers known to the server as well as a summary of their state. This is equivalent to the ’dmpeers’ interactive command.


                                                  -
                                                  +
                                                  +
                                                  + -

                                                  1.1.10 unconnected option (-u)

                                                  - +

                                                  1.1.10 unconnected option (-u)

                                                  +

                                                  This is the “use unconnected udp to communicate with ntpd (default on windows)” option. Open an unconnected UDP association to ntpd (the default @@ -398,29 +387,31 @@ on Windows).


                                                  -
                                                  +
                                                  +
                                                  + -

                                                  1.1.11 presetting/configuring ntpdc

                                                  +

                                                  1.1.11 presetting/configuring ntpdc

                                                  -

                                                  Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by -loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named NTPDC and NTPDC_<OPTION_NAME>. <OPTION_NAME> must be one of +

                                                  Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by +loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named NTPDC and NTPDC_<OPTION_NAME>. <OPTION_NAME> must be one of the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores. -The NTPDC variable will be tokenized and parsed like +The NTPDC variable will be tokenized and parsed like the command line. The remaining variables are tested for existence and their values are treated like option arguments.

                                                  -

                                                  libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files: -

                                                    -
                                                  • $HOME -
                                                  • $PWD +

                                                    libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files: +

                                                      +
                                                    • $HOME +
                                                    • $PWD
                                                    -

                                                    The environment variables HOME, and PWD -are expanded and replaced when ntpdc runs. +

                                                    The environment variables HOME, and PWD +are expanded and replaced when ntpdc runs. For any of these that are plain files, they are simply processed. -For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for +For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for within that directory and processed.

                                                    Configuration files may be in a wide variety of formats. @@ -433,122 +424,137 @@ lines by escaping the newline with a backslash. Common options are collected at the top, followed by program specific segments. The segments are separated by lines like:

                                                    -
                                                    [NTPDC]
                                                    +
                                                    [NTPDC]
                                                     

                                                    or by

                                                    -
                                                    <?program ntpdc>
                                                    +
                                                    <?program ntpdc>
                                                     

                                                    Do not mix these styles within one configuration file.

                                                    Compound values and carefully constructed string values may also be specified using XML syntax:

                                                    -
                                                    <option-name>
                                                    +
                                                    <option-name>
                                                        <sub-opt>...&lt;...&gt;...</sub-opt>
                                                     </option-name>
                                                     
                                                    -

                                                    yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of +

                                                    yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of

                                                    -
                                                    "...<...>..."
                                                    +
                                                    "...<...>..."
                                                     
                                                    -

                                                    AutoOpts does not track suboptions. You simply note that it is a -hierarchicly valued option. AutoOpts does provide a means for searching +

                                                    AutoOpts does not track suboptions. You simply note that it is a +hierarchicly valued option. AutoOpts does provide a means for searching the associated name/value pair list (see: optionFindValue).

                                                    The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are:

                                                    -

                                                    version (-)

                                                    +

                                                    version (-)

                                                    Print the program version to standard out, optionally with licensing information, then exit 0. The optional argument specifies how much licensing detail to provide. The default is to print just the version. The licensing information may be selected with an option argument. Only the first letter of the argument is examined:

                                                    -
                                                    -
                                                    version
                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    version

                                                    Only print the version. This is the default.

                                                    -
                                                    copyright
                                                    +
                                                    copyright

                                                    Name the copyright usage licensing terms.

                                                    -
                                                    verbose
                                                    +
                                                    verbose

                                                    Print the full copyright usage licensing terms.


                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    + -

                                                    1.1.12 ntpdc exit status

                                                    +

                                                    1.1.12 ntpdc exit status

                                                    One of the following exit values will be returned: -

                                                    -
                                                    0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
                                                    +

                                                    +
                                                    0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

                                                    Successful program execution.

                                                    -
                                                    1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
                                                    +
                                                    1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

                                                    The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

                                                    -
                                                    66 (EX_NOINPUT)
                                                    +
                                                    66 (EX_NOINPUT)

                                                    A specified configuration file could not be loaded.

                                                    -
                                                    70 (EX_SOFTWARE)
                                                    +
                                                    70 (EX_SOFTWARE)

                                                    libopts had an internal operational error. Please report it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you.


                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    + -

                                                    1.1.13 ntpdc Usage

                                                    +

                                                    1.1.13 ntpdc Usage


                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    + -

                                                    1.1.14 ntpdc See Also

                                                    +

                                                    1.1.14 ntpdc See Also


                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    + -

                                                    1.1.15 ntpdc Authors

                                                    +

                                                    1.1.15 ntpdc Authors


                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    + -

                                                    1.1.16 ntpdc Bugs

                                                    +

                                                    1.1.16 ntpdc Bugs


                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    + -

                                                    1.2 Usage

                                                    +

                                                    1.2 Usage

                                                    The simplest use of this program is as an unprivileged command to check the current time, offset, and error in the local clock. For example:

                                                    -
                                                    ntpdc ntpserver.somewhere
                                                    +
                                                    ntpdc ntpserver.somewhere
                                                     

                                                    With suitable privilege, it can be run as a command or in a -cron job to reset the local clock from a reliable server, like -the ntpdate and rdate commands. +cron job to reset the local clock from a reliable server, like +the ntpdate and rdate commands. For example:

                                                    -
                                                    ntpdc -a ntpserver.somewhere
                                                    +
                                                    ntpdc -a ntpserver.somewhere
                                                     
                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    diff --git a/ntpdc/ntpdc.man.in b/ntpdc/ntpdc.man.in index 151c23b0c..e6162a77a 100644 --- a/ntpdc/ntpdc.man.in +++ b/ntpdc/ntpdc.man.in @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntpdc @NTPDC_MS@ "06 Jun 2023" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" +.TH ntpdc @NTPDC_MS@ "07 Jan 2024" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:01 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:44 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpdc-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME @@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ RFC1305 .SH AUTHORS The formatting directives in this document came from FreeBSD. .SH "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .SH BUGS The diff --git a/ntpdc/ntpdc.mdoc.in b/ntpdc/ntpdc.mdoc.in index 1a7859c44..6e8fd75ea 100644 --- a/ntpdc/ntpdc.mdoc.in +++ b/ntpdc/ntpdc.mdoc.in @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTPDC @NTPDC_MS@ User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpdc-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:37:57 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:40 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpdc-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -792,7 +792,7 @@ it to autogen\-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .Sh AUTHORS The formatting directives in this document came from FreeBSD. .Sh "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .Sh BUGS The diff --git a/ntpq/invoke-ntpq.texi b/ntpq/invoke-ntpq.texi index 715dbcba7..915ec5ddb 100644 --- a/ntpq/invoke-ntpq.texi +++ b/ntpq/invoke-ntpq.texi @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ # # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (invoke-ntpq.texi) # -# It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:12 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +# It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:53 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 # From the definitions ntpq-opts.def # and the template file agtexi-cmd.tpl @end ignore diff --git a/ntpq/ntpq-opts.c b/ntpq/ntpq-opts.c index 3e176c057..1512b6f01 100644 --- a/ntpq/ntpq-opts.c +++ b/ntpq/ntpq-opts.c @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* * EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpq-opts.c) * - * It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:03 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 + * It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:35:55 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 * From the definitions ntpq-opts.def * and the template file options * @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ * The ntpq program is copyrighted and licensed * under the following terms: * - * Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. + * Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. * This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and * redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which * can be seen at: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ extern FILE * option_usage_fp; */ static char const ntpq_opt_strs[2068] = /* 0 */ "ntpq 4.2.8p17\n" - "Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n" + "Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n" "This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n" "redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n" "can be seen at:\n" @@ -874,7 +874,7 @@ static void bogus_function(void) { */ /* referenced via ntpqOptions.pzCopyright */ puts(_("ntpq 4.2.8p17\n\ -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\ +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\ This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n\ redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n\ can be seen at:\n")); diff --git a/ntpq/ntpq-opts.h b/ntpq/ntpq-opts.h index 60d2ba127..b7c15988d 100644 --- a/ntpq/ntpq-opts.h +++ b/ntpq/ntpq-opts.h @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* * EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpq-opts.h) * - * It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:02 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 + * It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:35:55 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 * From the definitions ntpq-opts.def * and the template file options * @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ * The ntpq program is copyrighted and licensed * under the following terms: * - * Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. + * Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. * This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and * redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which * can be seen at: diff --git a/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqman b/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqman index e4f93b336..3792c5e41 100644 --- a/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqman +++ b/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqman @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntpq 1ntpqman "06 Jun 2023" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" +.TH ntpq 1ntpqman "07 Jan 2024" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:15 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:55 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpq-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME @@ -1585,7 +1585,7 @@ it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .SH "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .SH "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .SH "BUGS" Please send bug reports to: https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org diff --git a/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqmdoc b/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqmdoc index 9ce7db948..3b3ef34f1 100644 --- a/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqmdoc +++ b/ntpq/ntpq.1ntpqmdoc @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTPQ 1ntpqmdoc User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpq-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:10 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:51 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpq-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -1051,7 +1051,7 @@ it to autogen\-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .Sh "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .Sh "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .Sh "BUGS" Please send bug reports to: https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org diff --git a/ntpq/ntpq.html b/ntpq/ntpq.html index 1ca91e4f3..04909696a 100644 --- a/ntpq/ntpq.html +++ b/ntpq/ntpq.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ - + - + ntpq: Network Time Protocol Query User’s Manual @@ -10,24 +10,20 @@ + + + + @@ -35,110 +31,83 @@ ul.no-bullet {list-style: none} -

                                                    ntpq: Network Time Protocol Query User’s Manual

                                                    - - -

                                                    Short Table of Contents

                                                    - - -
                                                    +
                                                    + -

                                                    ntpq: Network Time Protocol Query User Manual

                                                    +

                                                    ntpq: Network Time Protocol Query User Manual

                                                    -

                                                    The ntpq utility program is used to +

                                                    The ntpq utility program is used to monitor the operational status and determine the performance of -ntpd, the NTP daemon. -

                                                    -

                                                    This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntpq. -

                                                    - - - - - - - - - - - +ntpd, the NTP daemon. +

                                                    +

                                                    This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntpq. +

                                                    + +
                                                    +

                                                    Short Table of Contents

                                                    + +

                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    + -

                                                    1 Description

                                                    +

                                                    1 Description

                                                    -

                                                    The ntpq utility program is used to monitor NTP daemon ntpd operations and determine performance. +

                                                    The ntpq utility program is used to monitor NTP daemon ntpd operations and determine performance. It uses the standard NTP mode 6 control message formats defined in Appendix B of the NTPv3 specification RFC1305. The same formats are used in NTPv4, although some of the variable names have changed and new ones added. The description on this page is for the NTPv4 variables.

                                                    -

                                                    The program can be run either in interactive mode or controlled using command line arguments. Requests to read and write arbitrary variables can be assembled, with raw and pretty-printed output options being available. The ntpq can also obtain and print a list of peers in a common format by sending multiple queries to the server. -

                                                    -

                                                    If one or more request options is included on the command line when ntpq is executed, each of the requests will be sent to the NTP servers running on each of the hosts given as command line arguments, or on localhost by default. If no request options are given, ntpq will attempt to read commands from the standard input and execute these on the NTP server running on the first host given on the command line, again defaulting to localhost when no other host is specified. ntpq will prompt for commands if the standard input is a terminal device. -

                                                    -

                                                    ntpq uses NTP mode 6 packets to communicate with the NTP server, and hence can be used to query any compatible server on the network which permits it. Note that since NTP is a UDP protocol this communication will be somewhat unreliable, especially over large distances in terms of network topology. ntpq makes one attempt to retransmit requests, and will time requests out if the remote host is not heard from within a suitable timeout time. -

                                                    -

                                                    Note that in contexts where a host name is expected, a -4 qualifier preceding the host name forces DNS resolution to the IPv4 namespace, while a -6 qualifier forces DNS resolution to the IPv6 namespace. -

                                                    -

                                                    For examples and usage, see the NTP Debugging Techniques page. -

                                                    - - - - - - - - - - - +

                                                    The program can be run either in interactive mode or controlled using command line arguments. Requests to read and write arbitrary variables can be assembled, with raw and pretty-printed output options being available. The ntpq can also obtain and print a list of peers in a common format by sending multiple queries to the server. +

                                                    +

                                                    If one or more request options is included on the command line when ntpq is executed, each of the requests will be sent to the NTP servers running on each of the hosts given as command line arguments, or on localhost by default. If no request options are given, ntpq will attempt to read commands from the standard input and execute these on the NTP server running on the first host given on the command line, again defaulting to localhost when no other host is specified. ntpq will prompt for commands if the standard input is a terminal device. +

                                                    +

                                                    ntpq uses NTP mode 6 packets to communicate with the NTP server, and hence can be used to query any compatible server on the network which permits it. Note that since NTP is a UDP protocol this communication will be somewhat unreliable, especially over large distances in terms of network topology. ntpq makes one attempt to retransmit requests, and will time requests out if the remote host is not heard from within a suitable timeout time. +

                                                    +

                                                    Note that in contexts where a host name is expected, a -4 qualifier preceding the host name forces DNS resolution to the IPv4 namespace, while a -6 qualifier forces DNS resolution to the IPv6 namespace. +

                                                    +

                                                    For examples and usage, see the NTP Debugging Techniques page. +

                                                    +
                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    + -

                                                    1.1 Invoking ntpq

                                                    - - +

                                                    1.1 Invoking ntpq

                                                    + +

                                                    The -ntpq +ntpq utility program is used to query NTP servers to monitor NTP operations and performance, requesting information about current state and/or changes in that state. @@ -148,30 +117,30 @@ Requests to read and write arbitrary variables can be assembled, with raw and pretty-printed output options being available. The -ntpq +ntpq utility can also obtain and print a list of peers in a common format by sending multiple queries to the server.

                                                    If one or more request options is included on the command line when -ntpq +ntpq is executed, each of the requests will be sent to the NTP servers running on each of the hosts given as command line arguments, or on localhost by default. If no request options are given, -ntpq +ntpq will attempt to read commands from the standard input and execute these on the NTP server running on the first host given on the command line, again defaulting to localhost when no other host is specified. The -ntpq +ntpq utility will prompt for commands if the standard input is a terminal device.

                                                    -

                                                    ntpq +

                                                    ntpq uses NTP mode 6 packets to communicate with the NTP server, and hence can be used to query any compatible server on the network which permits it. @@ -179,17 +148,17 @@ Note that since NTP is a UDP protocol this communication will be somewhat unreliable, especially over large distances in terms of network topology. The -ntpq +ntpq utility makes one attempt to retransmit requests, and will time requests out if the remote host is not heard from within a suitable timeout time.

                                                    Note that in contexts where a host name is expected, a --4 +-4 qualifier preceding the host name forces resolution to the IPv4 namespace, while a --6 +-6 qualifier forces resolution to the IPv6 namespace. For examples and usage, see the “NTP Debugging Techniques” @@ -197,47 +166,35 @@ page.

                                                    Specifying a command line option other than --i +-i or --n +-n will cause the specified query (queries) to be sent to the indicated host(s) immediately. Otherwise, -ntpq +ntpq will attempt to read interactive format commands from the standard input.

                                                    - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

                                                    1.1.1 Internal Commands

                                                    + +
                                                    +

                                                    1.1.1 Internal Commands

                                                    Interactive format commands consist of a keyword followed by zero to four arguments. @@ -247,96 +204,96 @@ uniquely identify the command need be typed.

                                                    A number of interactive format commands are executed entirely within the -ntpq +ntpq utility itself and do not result in NTP requests being sent to a server. These are described following. -

                                                    -
                                                    ? [command]
                                                    -
                                                    help [command]
                                                    +

                                                    +
                                                    ? [command]
                                                    +
                                                    help [command]

                                                    A ‘?’ by itself will print a list of all the commands known to -ntpq +ntpq A ‘?’ followed by a command name will print function and usage information about the command.

                                                    -
                                                    addvars name[=value][,...]
                                                    -
                                                    rmvars name[,...]
                                                    -
                                                    clearvars
                                                    -
                                                    showvars
                                                    +
                                                    addvars name[=value][,...]
                                                    +
                                                    rmvars name[,...]
                                                    +
                                                    clearvars
                                                    +
                                                    showvars

                                                    The arguments to this command consist of a list of items of the form -name[=value], +name[=value], where the .No = Ns Ar value is ignored, and can be omitted, in requests to the server to read variables. The -ntpq +ntpq utility maintains an internal list in which data to be included in messages can be assembled, and displayed or set using the -readlist +readlist and -writelist +writelist commands described below. The -addvars +addvars command allows variables and their optional values to be added to the list. If more than one variable is to be added, the list should be comma-separated and not contain white space. The -rmvars +rmvars command can be used to remove individual variables from the list, while the -clearvars +clearvars command removes all variables from the list. The -showvars +showvars command displays the current list of optional variables.

                                                    -
                                                    authenticate [yes|no]
                                                    +
                                                    authenticate [yes|no]

                                                    Normally -ntpq +ntpq does not authenticate requests unless they are write requests. The command -authenticate yes +authenticate yes causes -ntpq +ntpq to send authentication with all requests it makes. Authenticated requests causes some servers to handle requests slightly differently. The command -authenticate +authenticate causes -ntpq +ntpq to display whether or not it is currently authenticating requests.

                                                    -
                                                    cooked
                                                    +
                                                    cooked

                                                    Causes output from query commands to be "cooked", so that variables which are recognized by -ntpq +ntpq will have their values reformatted for human consumption. Variables which -ntpq +ntpq could not decode completely are marked with a trailing ‘?’.

                                                    -
                                                    debug [more|less|off]
                                                    +
                                                    debug [more|less|off]

                                                    With no argument, displays the current debug level. Otherwise, the debugging level is changed as indicated.

                                                    -
                                                    delay [milliseconds]
                                                    +
                                                    delay [milliseconds]

                                                    Specify a time interval to be added to timestamps included in requests which require authentication. This is used to enable @@ -347,66 +304,66 @@ server does not now require timestamps in authenticated requests, so this command may be obsolete. Without any arguments, displays the current delay.

                                                    -
                                                    drefid [hash|ipv4]
                                                    +
                                                    drefid [hash|ipv4]

                                                    Display refids as IPv4 or hash. Without any arguments, displays whether refids are shown as IPv4 addresses or hashes.

                                                    -
                                                    exit
                                                    +
                                                    exit

                                                    Exit -ntpq +ntpq

                                                    -
                                                    host [name]
                                                    +
                                                    host [name]

                                                    Set the host to which future queries will be sent. The -name +name may be either a host name or a numeric address. Without any arguments, displays the current host.

                                                    -
                                                    hostnames [yes|no]
                                                    +
                                                    hostnames [yes|no]

                                                    If -yes +yes is specified, host names are printed in information displays. If -no +no is specified, numeric addresses are printed instead. The default is -yes, +yes, unless modified using the command line --n +-n switch. Without any arguments, displays whether host names or numeric addresses are shown.

                                                    -
                                                    keyid [keyid]
                                                    +
                                                    keyid [keyid]

                                                    This command allows the specification of a key number to be used to authenticate configuration requests. This must correspond to the -controlkey +controlkey key number the server has been configured to use for this purpose. Without any arguments, displays the current -keyid. +keyid.

                                                    -
                                                    keytype [digest]
                                                    +
                                                    keytype [digest]

                                                    Specify the digest algorithm to use for authenticating requests, with default -MD5. +MD5. If -ntpq +ntpq was built with OpenSSL support, and OpenSSL is installed, -digest +digest can be any message digest algorithm supported by OpenSSL. If no argument is given, the current -keytype digest +keytype digest algorithm used is displayed.

                                                    -
                                                    ntpversion [1|2|3|4]
                                                    +
                                                    ntpversion [1|2|3|4]

                                                    Sets the NTP version number which -ntpq +ntpq claims in packets. Defaults to 3, and note that mode 6 control messages (and @@ -416,7 +373,7 @@ to be no servers left which demand version 1. With no argument, displays the current NTP version that will be used when communicating with servers.

                                                    -
                                                    passwd
                                                    +
                                                    passwd

                                                    This command prompts you to type in a password (which will not be echoed) which will be used to authenticate configuration requests. @@ -424,41 +381,49 @@ The password must correspond to the key configured for use by the NTP server for this purpose if such requests are to be successful.

                                                    -
                                                    poll [n] [verbose]
                                                    +
                                                    poll [n] [verbose]

                                                    Poll an NTP server in client mode -n +n times. Poll not implemented yet.

                                                    -
                                                    quit
                                                    +
                                                    quit

                                                    Exit -ntpq +ntpq

                                                    -
                                                    raw
                                                    +
                                                    raw

                                                    Causes all output from query commands is printed as received from the remote server. The only formating/interpretation done on the data is to transform nonascii data into a printable (but barely understandable) form.

                                                    -
                                                    timeout [milliseconds]
                                                    +
                                                    timeout [milliseconds]

                                                    Specify a timeout period for responses to server queries. The default is about 5000 milliseconds. Without any arguments, displays the current timeout period. Note that since -ntpq +ntpq retries each query once after a timeout, the total waiting time for a timeout will be twice the timeout value set.

                                                    -
                                                    version
                                                    +
                                                    version

                                                    Display the version of the -ntpq +ntpq program.

                                                    -

                                                    1.1.1.1 Control Message Commands

                                                    + +
                                                    +

                                                    1.1.1.1 Control Message Commands

                                                    Association ids are used to identify system, peer and clock variables. System variables are assigned an association id of zero and system name space, while each association is assigned a nonzero association id and @@ -466,86 +431,86 @@ peer namespace. Most control commands send a single message to the server and expect a single response message. The exceptions are the -peers +peers command, which sends a series of messages, and the -mreadlist +mreadlist and -mreadvar +mreadvar commands, which iterate over a range of associations. -

                                                    -
                                                    apeers
                                                    +

                                                    +
                                                    apeers

                                                    Display a list of peers in the form:

                                                    -
                                                    [tally]remote refid assid st t when pool reach delay offset jitter
                                                    +
                                                    [tally]remote refid assid st t when pool reach delay offset jitter
                                                     

                                                    where the output is just like the -peers +peers command except that the -refid +refid is displayed in hex format and the association number is also displayed.

                                                    -
                                                    associations
                                                    +
                                                    associations

                                                    Display a list of mobilized associations in the form:

                                                    -
                                                    ind assid status conf reach auth condition last_event cnt
                                                    +
                                                    ind assid status conf reach auth condition last_event cnt
                                                     
                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    Sy Variable Ta Sy Description
                                                    -
                                                    ind Ta index on this list
                                                    -
                                                    assid Ta association id
                                                    -
                                                    status Ta peer status word
                                                    -
                                                    conf Ta yes: No persistent, no: No ephemeral
                                                    -
                                                    reach Ta yes: No reachable, no: No unreachable
                                                    -
                                                    auth Ta ok, yes, bad No and none
                                                    -
                                                    condition Ta selection status (see the select No field of the peer status word)
                                                    -
                                                    last_event Ta event report (see the event No field of the peer status word)
                                                    -
                                                    cnt Ta event count (see the count No field of the peer status word)
                                                    +
                                                    ind Ta index on this list
                                                    +
                                                    assid Ta association id
                                                    +
                                                    status Ta peer status word
                                                    +
                                                    conf Ta yes: No persistent, no: No ephemeral
                                                    +
                                                    reach Ta yes: No reachable, no: No unreachable
                                                    +
                                                    auth Ta ok, yes, bad No and none
                                                    +
                                                    condition Ta selection status (see the select No field of the peer status word)
                                                    +
                                                    last_event Ta event report (see the event No field of the peer status word)
                                                    +
                                                    cnt Ta event count (see the count No field of the peer status word)
                                                    -
                                                    authinfo
                                                    +
                                                    authinfo

                                                    Display the authentication statistics counters: time since reset, stored keys, free keys, key lookups, keys not found, uncached keys, expired keys, encryptions, decryptions.

                                                    -
                                                    clocklist [associd]
                                                    -
                                                    cl [associd]
                                                    +
                                                    clocklist [associd]
                                                    +
                                                    cl [associd]

                                                    Display all clock variables in the variable list for those associations supporting a reference clock.

                                                    -
                                                    clockvar [associd] [name[=value]][,...]
                                                    -
                                                    cv [associd] [name[=value]][,...]
                                                    +
                                                    clockvar [associd] [name[=value]][,...]
                                                    +
                                                    cv [associd] [name[=value]][,...]

                                                    Display a list of clock variables for those associations supporting a reference clock.

                                                    -
                                                    :config configuration command line
                                                    +
                                                    :config configuration command line

                                                    Send the remainder of the command line, including whitespace, to the server as a run-time configuration command in the same format as a line in the configuration file. This command is experimental until further notice and clarification. Authentication is of course required.

                                                    -
                                                    config-from-file filename
                                                    +
                                                    config-from-file filename

                                                    Send each line of -filename +filename to the server as run-time configuration commands in the same format as lines in the configuration file. This command is experimental until further notice and clarification. Authentication is required.

                                                    -
                                                    ifstats
                                                    +
                                                    ifstats

                                                    Display status and statistics counters for each local network interface address: interface number, interface name and address or broadcast, drop, flag, ttl, mc, received, sent, send failed, peers, uptime. Authentication is required.

                                                    -
                                                    iostats
                                                    +
                                                    iostats

                                                    Display network and reference clock I/O statistics: time since reset, receive buffers, free receive buffers, used receive buffers, low water refills, dropped packets, ignored packets, received packets, packets sent, packet send failures, input wakeups, useful input wakeups.

                                                    -
                                                    kerninfo
                                                    +
                                                    kerninfo

                                                    Display kernel loop and PPS statistics: associd, status, pll offset, pll frequency, maximum error, estimated error, kernel status, pll time constant, precision, @@ -557,304 +522,304 @@ may be shown as exponentials. The precision value displayed is in milliseconds as well, unlike the precision system variable.

                                                    -
                                                    lassociations
                                                    +
                                                    lassociations

                                                    Perform the same function as the associations command, except display mobilized and unmobilized associations, including all clients.

                                                    -
                                                    lopeers [-4|-6]
                                                    +
                                                    lopeers [-4|-6]

                                                    Display a list of all peers and clients showing -dstadr +dstadr (associated with the given IP version).

                                                    -
                                                    lpassociations
                                                    +
                                                    lpassociations

                                                    Display the last obtained list of associations, including all clients.

                                                    -
                                                    lpeers [-4|-6]
                                                    +
                                                    lpeers [-4|-6]

                                                    Display a list of all peers and clients (associated with the given IP version).

                                                    -
                                                    monstats
                                                    +
                                                    monstats

                                                    Display monitor facility status, statistics, and limits: enabled, addresses, peak addresses, maximum addresses, reclaim above count, reclaim older than, kilobytes, maximum kilobytes.

                                                    -
                                                    mreadlist associdlo associdhi
                                                    -
                                                    mrl associdlo associdhi
                                                    +
                                                    mreadlist associdlo associdhi
                                                    +
                                                    mrl associdlo associdhi

                                                    Perform the same function as the -readlist +readlist command for a range of association ids.

                                                    -
                                                    mreadvar associdlo associdhi [name][,...]
                                                    +
                                                    mreadvar associdlo associdhi [name][,...]

                                                    This range may be determined from the list displayed by any command showing associations.

                                                    -
                                                    mrv associdlo associdhi [name][,...]
                                                    +
                                                    mrv associdlo associdhi [name][,...]

                                                    Perform the same function as the -readvar +readvar command for a range of association ids. This range may be determined from the list displayed by any command showing associations.

                                                    -
                                                    mrulist [limited | kod | mincount=count | laddr=localaddr | sort=[-]sortorder | resany=hexmask | resall=hexmask]
                                                    +
                                                    mrulist [limited | kod | mincount=count | laddr=localaddr | sort=[-]sortorder | resany=hexmask | resall=hexmask]

                                                    Display traffic counts of the most recently seen source addresses collected and maintained by the monitor facility. With the exception of -sort=[-]sortorder, +sort=[-]sortorder, the options filter the list returned by -ntpd(8). +ntpd(8). The -limited +limited and -kod +kod options return only entries representing client addresses from which the last packet received triggered either discarding or a KoD response. The -mincount=count +mincount=count option filters entries representing less than -count +count packets. The -laddr=localaddr +laddr=localaddr option filters entries for packets received on any local address other than -localaddr. -resany=hexmask +localaddr. +resany=hexmask and -resall=hexmask +resall=hexmask filter entries containing none or less than all, respectively, of the bits in -hexmask, +hexmask, which must begin with -0x. +0x. The -sortorder +sortorder defaults to -lstint +lstint and may be -addr, -avgint, -count, -lstint, +addr, +avgint, +count, +lstint, or any of those preceded by ‘-’ to reverse the sort order. The output columns are: -

                                                    +

                                                    Column

                                                    Description

                                                    -
                                                    lstint
                                                    +
                                                    lstint

                                                    Interval in seconds between the receipt of the most recent packet from this address and the completion of the retrieval of the MRU list by -ntpq +ntpq

                                                    -
                                                    avgint
                                                    +
                                                    avgint

                                                    Average interval in s between packets from this address.

                                                    -
                                                    rstr
                                                    +
                                                    rstr

                                                    Restriction flags associated with this address. Most are copied unchanged from the matching -restrict +restrict command, however 0x400 (kod) and 0x20 (limited) flags are cleared unless the last packet from this address triggered a rate control response.

                                                    -
                                                    r
                                                    +
                                                    r

                                                    Rate control indicator, either a period, -L +L or -K +K for no rate control response, rate limiting by discarding, or rate limiting with a KoD response, respectively.

                                                    -
                                                    m
                                                    +
                                                    m

                                                    Packet mode.

                                                    -
                                                    v
                                                    +
                                                    v

                                                    Packet version number.

                                                    -
                                                    count
                                                    +
                                                    count

                                                    Packets received from this address.

                                                    -
                                                    rport
                                                    +
                                                    rport

                                                    Source port of last packet from this address.

                                                    -
                                                    remote address
                                                    +
                                                    remote address

                                                    host or DNS name, numeric address, or address followed by claimed DNS name which could not be verified in parentheses.

                                                    -
                                                    opeers [-4 | -6]
                                                    +
                                                    opeers [-4 | -6]

                                                    Obtain and print the old-style list of all peers and clients showing -dstadr +dstadr (associated with the given IP version), rather than the -refid. +refid.

                                                    -
                                                    passociations
                                                    +
                                                    passociations

                                                    Perform the same function as the -associations +associations command, except that it uses previously stored data rather than making a new query.

                                                    -
                                                    peers
                                                    +
                                                    peers

                                                    Display a list of peers in the form:

                                                    -
                                                    [tally]remote refid st t when pool reach delay offset jitter
                                                    +
                                                    [tally]remote refid st t when pool reach delay offset jitter
                                                     
                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    Variable

                                                    Description

                                                    -
                                                    [tally]
                                                    +
                                                    [tally]

                                                    single-character code indicating current value of the -select +select field of the .Lk decode.html#peer "peer status word"

                                                    -
                                                    remote
                                                    +
                                                    remote

                                                    host name (or IP number) of peer. The value displayed will be truncated to 15 characters unless the -ntpq --w +ntpq +-w option is given, in which case the full value will be displayed on the first line, and if too long, the remaining data will be displayed on the next line.

                                                    -
                                                    refid
                                                    +
                                                    refid

                                                    source IP address or .Lk decode.html#kiss "’kiss code"

                                                    -
                                                    st
                                                    +
                                                    st

                                                    stratum: 0 for local reference clocks, 1 for servers with local reference clocks, ..., 16 for unsynchronized server clocks

                                                    -
                                                    t
                                                    -

                                                    u: +

                                                    t
                                                    +

                                                    u: unicast or manycast client, -b: +b: broadcast or multicast client, -p: +p: pool source, -l: +l: local (reference clock), -s: +s: symmetric (peer), -A: +A: manycast server, -B: +B: broadcast server, -M: +M: multicast server

                                                    -
                                                    when
                                                    +
                                                    when

                                                    time in seconds, minutes, hours, or days since the last packet was received, or ‘-’ if a packet has never been received

                                                    -
                                                    poll
                                                    +
                                                    poll

                                                    poll interval (s)

                                                    -
                                                    reach
                                                    +
                                                    reach

                                                    reach shift register (octal)

                                                    -
                                                    delay
                                                    +
                                                    delay

                                                    roundtrip delay

                                                    -
                                                    offset
                                                    +
                                                    offset

                                                    offset of server relative to this host

                                                    -
                                                    jitter
                                                    +
                                                    jitter

                                                    offset RMS error estimate.

                                                    -
                                                    pstats associd
                                                    +
                                                    pstats associd

                                                    Display the statistics for the peer with the given -associd: +associd: associd, status, remote host, local address, time last received, time until next send, reachability change, packets sent, packets received, bad authentication, bogus origin, duplicate, bad dispersion, bad reference time, candidate order.

                                                    -
                                                    readlist [associd]
                                                    -
                                                    rl [associd]
                                                    +
                                                    readlist [associd]
                                                    +
                                                    rl [associd]

                                                    Display all system or peer variables. If the -associd +associd is omitted, it is assumed to be zero.

                                                    -
                                                    readvar [associd name[=value] [, ...]]
                                                    -
                                                    rv [associd name[=value] [, ...]]
                                                    +
                                                    readvar [associd name[=value] [, ...]]
                                                    +
                                                    rv [associd name[=value] [, ...]]

                                                    Display the specified system or peer variables. If -associd +associd is zero, the variables are from the -System Variables +System Variables name space, otherwise they are from the -Peer Variables +Peer Variables name space. The -associd +associd is required, as the same name can occur in both spaces. If no -name +name is included, all operative variables in the name space are displayed. In this case only, if the -associd +associd is omitted, it is assumed to be zero. Multiple names are specified with comma separators and without whitespace. Note that time values are represented in milliseconds and frequency values in parts-per-million (PPM). Some NTP timestamps are represented in the format -YYYYMM DD TTTT, +YYYYMM DD TTTT, where -YYYY +YYYY is the year, -MM +MM the month of year, -DD +DD the day of month and -TTTT +TTTT the time of day.

                                                    -
                                                    reslist
                                                    +
                                                    reslist

                                                    Display the access control (restrict) list for -ntpq +ntpq Authentication is required.

                                                    -
                                                    saveconfig filename
                                                    +
                                                    saveconfig filename

                                                    Save the current configuration, including any runtime modifications made by -:config +:config or -config-from-file, +config-from-file, to the NTP server host file -filename. +filename. This command will be rejected by the server unless .Lk miscopt.html#saveconfigdir "saveconfigdir" appears in the -ntpd(8) +ntpd(8) configuration file. -filename +filename can use -date(1) +date(1) format specifiers to substitute the current date and time, for example,

                                                    -
                                                    saveconfig ntp-%Y%m%d-%H%M%S.conf. 
                                                    +
                                                    saveconfig ntp-%Y%m%d-%H%M%S.conf. 
                                                     

                                                    The filename used is stored in system variable -savedconfig. +savedconfig. Authentication is required.

                                                    -
                                                    sysinfo
                                                    +
                                                    sysinfo

                                                    Display system operational summary: associd, status, system peer, system peer mode, leap indicator, stratum, log2 precision, root delay, root dispersion, reference id, reference time, system jitter, clock jitter, clock wander, broadcast delay, symm. auth. delay.

                                                    -
                                                    sysstats
                                                    +
                                                    sysstats

                                                    Display system uptime and packet counts maintained in the protocol module: uptime, sysstats reset, packets received, current version, @@ -862,38 +827,40 @@ older version, bad length or format, authentication failed, declined, restricted, rate limited, KoD responses, processed for time.

                                                    -
                                                    timerstats
                                                    +
                                                    timerstats

                                                    Display interval timer counters: time since reset, timer overruns, calls to transmit.

                                                    -
                                                    writelist associd
                                                    +
                                                    writelist associd

                                                    Set all system or peer variables included in the variable list.

                                                    -
                                                    writevar associd name=value [, ...]
                                                    +
                                                    writevar associd name=value [, ...]

                                                    Set the specified variables in the variable list. If the -associd +associd is zero, the variables are from the -System Variables +System Variables name space, otherwise they are from the -Peer Variables +Peer Variables name space. The -associd +associd is required, as the same name can occur in both spaces. Authentication is required.

                                                    -

                                                    1.1.1.2 Status Words and Kiss Codes

                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    +

                                                    1.1.1.2 Status Words and Kiss Codes

                                                    The current state of the operating program is shown in a set of status words maintained by the system. Status information is also available on a per-association basis. These words are displayed by the -readlist +readlist and -associations +associations commands both in hexadecimal and in decoded short tip strings. The codes, tips and short explanations are documented on the .Lk decode.html "Event Messages and Status Words" @@ -909,84 +876,86 @@ sent by the server to advise the client of an unusual condition. They are now displayed, when appropriate, in the reference identifier field in various billboards.

                                                    -

                                                    1.1.1.3 System Variables

                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    +

                                                    1.1.1.3 System Variables

                                                    The following system variables appear in the -readlist +readlist billboard. Not all variables are displayed in some configurations.

                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    Variable

                                                    Description

                                                    -
                                                    status
                                                    +
                                                    status

                                                    .Lk decode.html#sys "system status word"

                                                    -
                                                    version
                                                    +
                                                    version

                                                    NTP software version and build time

                                                    -
                                                    processor
                                                    +
                                                    processor

                                                    hardware platform and version

                                                    -
                                                    system
                                                    +
                                                    system

                                                    operating system and version

                                                    -
                                                    leap
                                                    +
                                                    leap

                                                    leap warning indicator (0-3)

                                                    -
                                                    stratum
                                                    +
                                                    stratum

                                                    stratum (1-15)

                                                    -
                                                    precision
                                                    +
                                                    precision

                                                    precision (log2 s)

                                                    -
                                                    rootdelay
                                                    +
                                                    rootdelay

                                                    total roundtrip delay to the primary reference clock

                                                    -
                                                    rootdisp
                                                    +
                                                    rootdisp

                                                    total dispersion to the primary reference clock

                                                    -
                                                    refid
                                                    +
                                                    refid

                                                    reference id or .Lk decode.html#kiss "kiss code"

                                                    -
                                                    reftime
                                                    +
                                                    reftime

                                                    reference time

                                                    -
                                                    clock
                                                    +
                                                    clock

                                                    date and time of day

                                                    -
                                                    peer
                                                    +
                                                    peer

                                                    system peer association id

                                                    -
                                                    tc
                                                    +
                                                    tc

                                                    time constant and poll exponent (log2 s) (3-17)

                                                    -
                                                    mintc
                                                    +
                                                    mintc

                                                    minimum time constant (log2 s) (3-10)

                                                    -
                                                    offset
                                                    +
                                                    offset

                                                    combined offset of server relative to this host

                                                    -
                                                    frequency
                                                    +
                                                    frequency

                                                    frequency drift (PPM) relative to hardware clock

                                                    -
                                                    sys_jitter
                                                    +
                                                    sys_jitter

                                                    combined system jitter

                                                    -
                                                    clk_wander
                                                    +
                                                    clk_wander

                                                    clock frequency wander (PPM)

                                                    -
                                                    clk_jitter
                                                    +
                                                    clk_jitter

                                                    clock jitter

                                                    -
                                                    tai
                                                    +
                                                    tai

                                                    TAI-UTC offset (s)

                                                    -
                                                    leapsec
                                                    +
                                                    leapsec

                                                    NTP seconds when the next leap second is/was inserted

                                                    -
                                                    expire
                                                    +
                                                    expire

                                                    NTP seconds when the NIST leapseconds file expires

                                                    @@ -998,283 +967,262 @@ the clock jitter statistic is computed by the clock discipline module. additional system variables are displayed, including some or all of the following, depending on the particular Autokey dance: -

                                                    +

                                                    Variable

                                                    Description

                                                    -
                                                    host
                                                    +
                                                    host

                                                    Autokey host name for this host

                                                    -
                                                    ident
                                                    +
                                                    ident

                                                    Autokey group name for this host

                                                    -
                                                    flags
                                                    +
                                                    flags

                                                    host flags (see Autokey specification)

                                                    -
                                                    digest
                                                    +
                                                    digest

                                                    OpenSSL message digest algorithm

                                                    -
                                                    signature
                                                    +
                                                    signature

                                                    OpenSSL digest/signature scheme

                                                    -
                                                    update
                                                    +
                                                    update

                                                    NTP seconds at last signature update

                                                    -
                                                    cert
                                                    +
                                                    cert

                                                    certificate subject, issuer and certificate flags

                                                    -
                                                    until
                                                    +
                                                    until

                                                    NTP seconds when the certificate expires

                                                    -

                                                    1.1.1.4 Peer Variables

                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    +

                                                    1.1.1.4 Peer Variables

                                                    The following peer variables appear in the -readlist +readlist billboard for each association. Not all variables are displayed in some configurations.

                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    Variable

                                                    Description

                                                    -
                                                    associd
                                                    +
                                                    associd

                                                    association id

                                                    -
                                                    status
                                                    +
                                                    status

                                                    .Lk decode.html#peer "peer status word"

                                                    -
                                                    srcadr
                                                    +
                                                    srcadr

                                                    source (remote) IP address

                                                    -
                                                    srcport
                                                    +
                                                    srcport

                                                    source (remote) port

                                                    -
                                                    dstadr
                                                    +
                                                    dstadr

                                                    destination (local) IP address

                                                    -
                                                    dstport
                                                    +
                                                    dstport

                                                    destination (local) port

                                                    -
                                                    leap
                                                    +
                                                    leap

                                                    leap indicator (0-3)

                                                    -
                                                    stratum
                                                    +
                                                    stratum

                                                    stratum (0-15)

                                                    -
                                                    precision
                                                    +
                                                    precision

                                                    precision (log2 s)

                                                    -
                                                    rootdelay
                                                    +
                                                    rootdelay

                                                    total roundtrip delay to the primary reference clock

                                                    -
                                                    rootdisp
                                                    +
                                                    rootdisp

                                                    total root dispersion to the primary reference clock

                                                    -
                                                    refid
                                                    +
                                                    refid

                                                    reference id or .Lk decode.html#kiss "kiss code"

                                                    -
                                                    reftime
                                                    +
                                                    reftime

                                                    reference time

                                                    -
                                                    rec
                                                    +
                                                    rec

                                                    last packet received time

                                                    -
                                                    reach
                                                    +
                                                    reach

                                                    reach register (octal)

                                                    -
                                                    unreach
                                                    +
                                                    unreach

                                                    unreach counter

                                                    -
                                                    hmode
                                                    +
                                                    hmode

                                                    host mode (1-6)

                                                    -
                                                    pmode
                                                    +
                                                    pmode

                                                    peer mode (1-5)

                                                    -
                                                    hpoll
                                                    +
                                                    hpoll

                                                    host poll exponent (log2 s) (3-17)

                                                    -
                                                    ppoll
                                                    +
                                                    ppoll

                                                    peer poll exponent (log2 s) (3-17)

                                                    -
                                                    headway
                                                    +
                                                    headway

                                                    headway (see .Lk rate.html "Rate Management and the Kiss-o’-Death Packet" )

                                                    -
                                                    flash
                                                    +
                                                    flash

                                                    .Lk decode.html#flash "flash status word"

                                                    -
                                                    keyid
                                                    +
                                                    keyid

                                                    symmetric key id

                                                    -
                                                    offset
                                                    +
                                                    offset

                                                    filter offset

                                                    -
                                                    delay
                                                    +
                                                    delay

                                                    filter delay

                                                    -
                                                    dispersion
                                                    +
                                                    dispersion

                                                    filter dispersion

                                                    -
                                                    jitter
                                                    +
                                                    jitter

                                                    filter jitter

                                                    -
                                                    bias
                                                    +
                                                    bias

                                                    unicast/broadcast bias

                                                    -
                                                    xleave
                                                    +
                                                    xleave

                                                    interleave delay (see .Lk xleave.html "NTP Interleaved Modes" )

                                                    The -bias +bias variable is calculated when the first broadcast packet is received after the calibration volley. It represents the offset of the broadcast subgraph relative to the unicast subgraph. The -xleave +xleave variable appears only for the interleaved symmetric and interleaved modes. It represents the internal queuing, buffering and transmission delays for the preceding packet.

                                                    When the NTPv4 daemon is compiled with the OpenSSL software library, additional peer variables are displayed, including the following: -

                                                    +

                                                    Variable

                                                    Description

                                                    -
                                                    flags
                                                    +
                                                    flags

                                                    peer flags (see Autokey specification)

                                                    -
                                                    host
                                                    +
                                                    host

                                                    Autokey server name

                                                    -
                                                    flags
                                                    +
                                                    flags

                                                    peer flags (see Autokey specification)

                                                    -
                                                    signature
                                                    +
                                                    signature

                                                    OpenSSL digest/signature scheme

                                                    -
                                                    initsequence
                                                    +
                                                    initsequence

                                                    initial key id

                                                    -
                                                    initkey
                                                    +
                                                    initkey

                                                    initial key index

                                                    -
                                                    timestamp
                                                    +
                                                    timestamp

                                                    Autokey signature timestamp

                                                    -
                                                    ident
                                                    +
                                                    ident

                                                    Autokey group name for this association

                                                    -

                                                    1.1.1.5 Clock Variables

                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    +

                                                    1.1.1.5 Clock Variables

                                                    The following clock variables appear in the -clocklist +clocklist billboard for each association with a reference clock. Not all variables are displayed in some configurations. -

                                                    +

                                                    Variable

                                                    Description

                                                    -
                                                    associd
                                                    +
                                                    associd

                                                    association id

                                                    -
                                                    status
                                                    +
                                                    status

                                                    .Lk decode.html#clock "clock status word"

                                                    -
                                                    device
                                                    +
                                                    device

                                                    device description

                                                    -
                                                    timecode
                                                    +
                                                    timecode

                                                    ASCII time code string (specific to device)

                                                    -
                                                    poll
                                                    +
                                                    poll

                                                    poll messages sent

                                                    -
                                                    noreply
                                                    +
                                                    noreply

                                                    no reply

                                                    -
                                                    badformat
                                                    +
                                                    badformat

                                                    bad format

                                                    -
                                                    baddata
                                                    +
                                                    baddata

                                                    bad date or time

                                                    -
                                                    fudgetime1
                                                    +
                                                    fudgetime1

                                                    fudge time 1

                                                    -
                                                    fudgetime2
                                                    +
                                                    fudgetime2

                                                    fudge time 2

                                                    -
                                                    stratum
                                                    +
                                                    stratum

                                                    driver stratum

                                                    -
                                                    refid
                                                    +
                                                    refid

                                                    driver reference id

                                                    -
                                                    flags
                                                    +
                                                    flags

                                                    driver flags

                                                    -

                                                    This section was generated by AutoGen, -using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntpq program. +

                                                    This section was generated by AutoGen, +using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntpq program. This software is released under the NTP license, <http://ntp.org/license>.

                                                    - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    + -

                                                    1.1.2 ntpq help/usage (--help)

                                                    - +

                                                    1.1.2 ntpq help/usage (--help)

                                                    +

                                                    This is the automatically generated usage text for ntpq.

                                                    -

                                                    The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option -(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print +

                                                    The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option +(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. -more-help is disabled on platforms without a working -fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is -used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit +more-help is disabled on platforms without a working +fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is +used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

                                                    -
                                                    ntpq - standard NTP query program - Ver. 4.2.8p17
                                                    +
                                                    ntpq - standard NTP query program - Ver. 4.2.8p17
                                                     Usage:  ntpq [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... [ host ...]
                                                       Flg Arg Option-Name    Description
                                                        -4 no  ipv4           Force IPv4 name resolution
                                                    @@ -1322,144 +1270,160 @@ Please send bug reports to:  <https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org>
                                                     

                                                    -
                                                    +
                                                    +
                                                    + -

                                                    1.1.3 ipv4 option (-4)

                                                    - +

                                                    1.1.3 ipv4 option (-4)

                                                    +

                                                    This is the “force ipv4 name resolution” option.

                                                    This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                                      -
                                                    • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                                                        +
                                                      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: ipv6.

                                                      Force resolution of following host names on the command line to the IPv4 namespace.


                                                      -
                                                      +
                                                      +
                                                      + -

                                                      1.1.4 ipv6 option (-6)

                                                      - +

                                                      1.1.4 ipv6 option (-6)

                                                      +

                                                      This is the “force ipv6 name resolution” option.

                                                      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                                        -
                                                      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                                                          +
                                                        • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: ipv4.

                                                        Force resolution of following host names on the command line to the IPv6 namespace.


                                                        -
                                                        +
                                                        +
                                                        + -

                                                        1.1.5 command option (-c)

                                                        - +

                                                        1.1.5 command option (-c)

                                                        +

                                                        This is the “run a command and exit” option. -This option takes a string argument cmd. +This option takes a string argument cmd.

                                                        This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                                          -
                                                        • may appear an unlimited number of times. +

                                                            +
                                                          • may appear an unlimited number of times.

                                                          The following argument is interpreted as an interactive format command and is added to the list of commands to be executed on the specified host(s).


                                                          -
                                                          +
                                                          +
                                                          + -

                                                          1.1.6 interactive option (-i)

                                                          - +

                                                          1.1.6 interactive option (-i)

                                                          +

                                                          This is the “force ntpq to operate in interactive mode” option.

                                                          This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                                            -
                                                          • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                                                              +
                                                            • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: command, peers.
                                                            -

                                                            Force ntpq to operate in interactive mode. +

                                                            Force ntpq to operate in interactive mode. Prompts will be written to the standard output and commands read from the standard input.


                                                            -
                                                            +
                                                            +
                                                            + -

                                                            1.1.7 numeric option (-n)

                                                            - +

                                                            1.1.7 numeric option (-n)

                                                            +

                                                            This is the “numeric host addresses” option. Output all host addresses in dotted-quad numeric format rather than converting to the canonical host names.


                                                            -
                                                            +
                                                            +
                                                            + -

                                                            1.1.8 old-rv option

                                                            - +

                                                            1.1.8 old-rv option

                                                            +

                                                            This is the “always output status line with readvar” option. -By default, ntpq now suppresses the associd=... -line that precedes the output of readvar -(alias rv) when a single variable is requested, such as -ntpq -c "rv 0 offset". -This option causes ntpq to include both lines of output -for a single-variable readvar. +By default, ntpq now suppresses the associd=... +line that precedes the output of readvar +(alias rv) when a single variable is requested, such as +ntpq -c "rv 0 offset". +This option causes ntpq to include both lines of output +for a single-variable readvar. Using an environment variable to preset this option in a script will enable both older and -newer ntpq to behave identically in this regard. +newer ntpq to behave identically in this regard.


                                                            -
                                                            +
                                                            +
                                                            + -

                                                            1.1.9 peers option (-p)

                                                            - +

                                                            1.1.9 peers option (-p)

                                                            +

                                                            This is the “print a list of the peers” option.

                                                            This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                                              -
                                                            • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                                                                +
                                                              • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: interactive.

                                                              Print a list of the peers known to the server as well as a summary of their state. This is equivalent to the ’peers’ interactive command.


                                                              -
                                                              +
                                                              +
                                                              + -

                                                              1.1.10 refid option (-r)

                                                              - +

                                                              1.1.10 refid option (-r)

                                                              +

                                                              This is the “set default display type for s2+ refids” option. This option takes a keyword argument.

                                                              This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                                                -
                                                              • This option takes a keyword as its argument. +

                                                                  +
                                                                • This option takes a keyword as its argument. The argument sets an enumeration value that can be tested by comparing the option value macro (OPT_VALUE_REFID). The available keywords are:
                                                                  -
                                                                      hash ipv4
                                                                  +
                                                                      hash ipv4
                                                                   

                                                                  or their numeric equivalent. @@ -1467,23 +1431,27 @@ The available keywords are:

                                                                  Set the default display format for S2+ refids.


                                                                  -
                                                                  +
                                                                  +
                                                                  + -

                                                                  1.1.11 unconnected option (-u)

                                                                  - +

                                                                  1.1.11 unconnected option (-u)

                                                                  +

                                                                  This is the “use unconnected udp to communicate with ntpd (default on windows)” option. Open an unconnected UDP association to ntpd (the default on Windows).


                                                                  -
                                                                  +
                                                                  +
                                                                  + -

                                                                  1.1.12 wide option (-w)

                                                                  - +

                                                                  1.1.12 wide option (-w)

                                                                  +

                                                                  This is the “display the full ’remote’ value” option. Display the full value of the ’remote’ value. If this requires @@ -1492,29 +1460,31 @@ and continue the data display properly indented on the next line.


                                                                  -
                                                                  +
                                                                  +
                                                                  + -

                                                                  1.1.13 presetting/configuring ntpq

                                                                  +

                                                                  1.1.13 presetting/configuring ntpq

                                                                  -

                                                                  Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by -loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named NTPQ and NTPQ_<OPTION_NAME>. <OPTION_NAME> must be one of +

                                                                  Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by +loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named NTPQ and NTPQ_<OPTION_NAME>. <OPTION_NAME> must be one of the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores. -The NTPQ variable will be tokenized and parsed like +The NTPQ variable will be tokenized and parsed like the command line. The remaining variables are tested for existence and their values are treated like option arguments.

                                                                  -

                                                                  libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files: -

                                                                    -
                                                                  • $HOME -
                                                                  • $PWD +

                                                                    libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files: +

                                                                      +
                                                                    • $HOME +
                                                                    • $PWD
                                                                    -

                                                                    The environment variables HOME, and PWD -are expanded and replaced when ntpq runs. +

                                                                    The environment variables HOME, and PWD +are expanded and replaced when ntpq runs. For any of these that are plain files, they are simply processed. -For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for +For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for within that directory and processed.

                                                                    Configuration files may be in a wide variety of formats. @@ -1527,237 +1497,248 @@ lines by escaping the newline with a backslash. Common options are collected at the top, followed by program specific segments. The segments are separated by lines like:

                                                                    -
                                                                    [NTPQ]
                                                                    +
                                                                    [NTPQ]
                                                                     

                                                                    or by

                                                                    -
                                                                    <?program ntpq>
                                                                    +
                                                                    <?program ntpq>
                                                                     

                                                                    Do not mix these styles within one configuration file.

                                                                    Compound values and carefully constructed string values may also be specified using XML syntax:

                                                                    -
                                                                    <option-name>
                                                                    +
                                                                    <option-name>
                                                                        <sub-opt>...&lt;...&gt;...</sub-opt>
                                                                     </option-name>
                                                                     
                                                                    -

                                                                    yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of +

                                                                    yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of

                                                                    -
                                                                    "...<...>..."
                                                                    +
                                                                    "...<...>..."
                                                                     
                                                                    -

                                                                    AutoOpts does not track suboptions. You simply note that it is a -hierarchicly valued option. AutoOpts does provide a means for searching +

                                                                    AutoOpts does not track suboptions. You simply note that it is a +hierarchicly valued option. AutoOpts does provide a means for searching the associated name/value pair list (see: optionFindValue).

                                                                    The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are:

                                                                    -

                                                                    version (-)

                                                                    +

                                                                    version (-)

                                                                    Print the program version to standard out, optionally with licensing information, then exit 0. The optional argument specifies how much licensing detail to provide. The default is to print just the version. The licensing information may be selected with an option argument. Only the first letter of the argument is examined:

                                                                    -
                                                                    -
                                                                    version
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    version

                                                                    Only print the version. This is the default.

                                                                    -
                                                                    copyright
                                                                    +
                                                                    copyright

                                                                    Name the copyright usage licensing terms.

                                                                    -
                                                                    verbose
                                                                    +
                                                                    verbose

                                                                    Print the full copyright usage licensing terms.


                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.1.14 ntpq exit status

                                                                    +

                                                                    1.1.14 ntpq exit status

                                                                    One of the following exit values will be returned: -

                                                                    -
                                                                    0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
                                                                    +

                                                                    +
                                                                    0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

                                                                    Successful program execution.

                                                                    -
                                                                    1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
                                                                    +
                                                                    1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

                                                                    The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

                                                                    -
                                                                    66 (EX_NOINPUT)
                                                                    +
                                                                    66 (EX_NOINPUT)

                                                                    A specified configuration file could not be loaded.

                                                                    -
                                                                    70 (EX_SOFTWARE)
                                                                    +
                                                                    70 (EX_SOFTWARE)

                                                                    libopts had an internal operational error. Please report it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you.


                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.2 Usage

                                                                    +

                                                                    1.2 Usage

                                                                    - +
                                                                    - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + +
                                                                    WhatDefaultFlagOption
                                                                    configuration file/etc/ntp.conf-cconffile
                                                                    frequency filenone-fdriftfile
                                                                    leapseconds filenoneleapfile
                                                                    process ID filenone-ppidfile
                                                                    log filesystem log-llogfile
                                                                    include filenonenoneincludefile
                                                                    statistics path/var/NTP-sstatsdir
                                                                    keys path/usr/local/etc-kkeysdir
                                                                    configuration file/etc/ntp.conf-cconffile
                                                                    frequency filenone-fdriftfile
                                                                    leapseconds filenoneleapfile
                                                                    process ID filenone-ppidfile
                                                                    log filesystem log-llogfile
                                                                    include filenonenoneincludefile
                                                                    statistics path/var/NTP-sstatsdir
                                                                    keys path/usr/local/etc-kkeysdir

                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.3 Internal Commands

                                                                    +

                                                                    1.3 Internal Commands

                                                                    -

                                                                    Interactive format commands consist of a keyword followed by zero to four arguments. Only enough characters of the full keyword to uniquely identify the command need be typed. The output of a command is normally sent to the standard output, but optionally the output of individual commands may be sent to a file by appending a >, followed by a file name, to the command line. A number of interactive format commands are executed entirely within the ntpq program itself and do not result in NTP mode-6 requests being sent to a server. These are described following. +

                                                                    Interactive format commands consist of a keyword followed by zero to four arguments. Only enough characters of the full keyword to uniquely identify the command need be typed. The output of a command is normally sent to the standard output, but optionally the output of individual commands may be sent to a file by appending a >, followed by a file name, to the command line. A number of interactive format commands are executed entirely within the ntpq program itself and do not result in NTP mode-6 requests being sent to a server. These are described following.

                                                                    -
                                                                    -
                                                                    ? [command_keyword]
                                                                    -
                                                                    help [command_keyword]
                                                                    -

                                                                    A ? by itself will print a list of all the command keywords known to ntpq. A ? followed by a command keyword will print function and usage information about the command. +

                                                                    +
                                                                    ? [command_keyword]
                                                                    +
                                                                    help [command_keyword]
                                                                    +

                                                                    A ? by itself will print a list of all the command keywords known to ntpq. A ? followed by a command keyword will print function and usage information about the command.

                                                                    -
                                                                    >addvars name [ = value] [...]
                                                                    -
                                                                    rmvars name [...]
                                                                    -
                                                                    clearvars</dt>
                                                                    +
                                                                    >addvars name [ = value] [...]
                                                                    +
                                                                    rmvars name [...]
                                                                    +
                                                                    clearvars</dt>

                                                                    The arguments to these commands consist of a list of items of the form -name = value, where the = value is ignored, +name = value, where the = value is ignored, and can be omitted in read requests. -ntpq maintains an internal list in which data to be included -in control messages can be assembled, and sent using the readlist -and writelist commands described below. -The addvars command allows variables and optional values +ntpq maintains an internal list in which data to be included +in control messages can be assembled, and sent using the readlist +and writelist commands described below. +The addvars command allows variables and optional values to be added to the list. If more than one variable is to be added the list should be comma-separated and not contain white space. -The rmvars command can be used to remove individual variables +The rmvars command can be used to remove individual variables from the list, -while the clearlist command removes all variables from the list. +while the clearlist command removes all variables from the list.

                                                                    -
                                                                    cooked
                                                                    +
                                                                    cooked

                                                                    Display server messages in prettyprint format.

                                                                    -
                                                                    debug more | less | off
                                                                    +
                                                                    debug more | less | off

                                                                    Turns internal query program debugging on and off.

                                                                    -
                                                                    delay milliseconds
                                                                    +
                                                                    delay milliseconds

                                                                    Specify a time interval to be added to timestamps included in requests which require authentication. This is used to enable (unreliable) server reconfiguration over long delay network paths or between machines whose clocks are unsynchronized. Actually the server does not now require timestamps in authenticated requests, so this command may be obsolete.

                                                                    -
                                                                    host name
                                                                    +
                                                                    host name

                                                                    Set the host to which future queries will be sent. The name may be either a DNS name or a numeric address.

                                                                    -
                                                                    hostnames [yes | no]
                                                                    -

                                                                    If yes is specified, host names are printed in information displays. -If no is specified, numeric addresses are printed instead. -The default is yes, -unless modified using the command line -n switch. +

                                                                    hostnames [yes | no]
                                                                    +

                                                                    If yes is specified, host names are printed in information displays. +If no is specified, numeric addresses are printed instead. +The default is yes, +unless modified using the command line -n switch.

                                                                    -
                                                                    keyid keyid
                                                                    +
                                                                    keyid keyid

                                                                    This command specifies the key number to be used to authenticate configuration requests. -This must correspond to a key ID configured in ntp.conf for this purpose. +This must correspond to a key ID configured in ntp.conf for this purpose.

                                                                    -
                                                                    keytype
                                                                    +
                                                                    keytype

                                                                    Specify the digest algorithm to use for authenticated requests, -with default MD5. +with default MD5. If the OpenSSL library is installed, digest can be be any message digest algorithm supported by the library. -The current selections are: AES128CMAC, MD2, MD4, MD5, MDC2, RIPEMD160, SHA and SHA1. +The current selections are: AES128CMAC, MD2, MD4, MD5, MDC2, RIPEMD160, SHA and SHA1.

                                                                    -
                                                                    ntpversion 1 | 2 | 3 | 4
                                                                    -

                                                                    Sets the NTP version number which ntpq claims in packets. +

                                                                    ntpversion 1 | 2 | 3 | 4
                                                                    +

                                                                    Sets the NTP version number which ntpq claims in packets. Defaults to 2. Note that mode-6 control messages (and modes, for that matter) didn’t exist in NTP version 1.

                                                                    -
                                                                    passwd
                                                                    +
                                                                    passwd

                                                                    This command prompts for a password to authenticate requests. -The password must correspond to the key ID configured in ntp.conf for this purpose. +The password must correspond to the key ID configured in ntp.conf for this purpose.

                                                                    -
                                                                    quit
                                                                    -

                                                                    Exit ntpq. +

                                                                    quit
                                                                    +

                                                                    Exit ntpq.

                                                                    -
                                                                    raw
                                                                    +
                                                                    raw

                                                                    Display server messages as received and without reformatting.

                                                                    -
                                                                    timeout milliseconds
                                                                    +
                                                                    timeout milliseconds

                                                                    Specify a timeout period for responses to server queries. The default is about 5000 milliseconds. -Note that since ntpq retries each query once after a timeout +Note that since ntpq retries each query once after a timeout the total waiting time for a timeout will be twice the timeout value set.


                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.4 Control Message Commands

                                                                    +

                                                                    1.4 Control Message Commands

                                                                    Association IDs are used to identify system, peer and clock variables. System variables are assigned an association ID of zero and system name space, while each association is assigned a nonzero association ID and peer namespace. Most control commands send a single mode-6 message to the server and expect a single response message. -The exceptions are the peers command, +The exceptions are the peers command, which sends a series of messages, -and the mreadlist and mreadvar commands, +and the mreadlist and mreadvar commands, which iterate over a range of associations.

                                                                    -
                                                                    -
                                                                    associations
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    associations

                                                                    Display a list of mobilized associations in the form:
                                                                    -ind assid status conf reach auth condition last_event cnt +ind assid status conf reach auth condition last_event cnt

                                                                    - +
                                                                    - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + +
                                                                    VariableDescription
                                                                    indindex on this list
                                                                    assidassociation ID
                                                                    statuspeer status word
                                                                    confyes: persistent, no: ephemeral
                                                                    reachyes: reachable, no: unreachable
                                                                    authok, yes, bad and none
                                                                    conditionselection status (see the select field of the peer status word)
                                                                    last_eventevent report (see the event field of the peer status word)
                                                                    cnt -event count (see the count field of the peer status word)
                                                                    indindex on this list
                                                                    assidassociation ID
                                                                    statuspeer status word
                                                                    confyes: persistent, no: ephemeral
                                                                    reachyes: reachable, no: unreachable
                                                                    authok, yes, bad and none
                                                                    conditionselection status (see the select field of the peer status word)
                                                                    last_eventevent report (see the event field of the peer status word)
                                                                    cnt +event count (see the count field of the peer status word)
                                                                    -
                                                                    clockvar assocID [name [ = value [...]] [...]]
                                                                    -
                                                                    cv assocID [name [ = value [...] ][...]]
                                                                    +
                                                                    clockvar assocID [name [ = value [...]] [...]]
                                                                    +
                                                                    cv assocID [name [ = value [...] ][...]]

                                                                    Display a list of ‘clock variables’ for those associations supporting a reference clock.

                                                                    -
                                                                    :config [...]
                                                                    +
                                                                    :config [...]

                                                                    Send the remainder of the command line, including whitespace, to the server as a run-time configuration command in the same format as the configuration file. @@ -1765,131 +1746,133 @@ This command is experimental until further notice and clarification. Authentication is of course required.

                                                                    -
                                                                    config-from-file filename
                                                                    -

                                                                    Send the each line of filename to the server as +

                                                                    config-from-file filename
                                                                    +

                                                                    Send the each line of filename to the server as run-time configuration commands in the same format as the configuration file. This command is experimental until further notice and clarification. Authentication is required.

                                                                    -
                                                                    ifstats
                                                                    +
                                                                    ifstats

                                                                    Display statistics for each local network address. Authentication is required.

                                                                    -
                                                                    iostats
                                                                    +
                                                                    iostats

                                                                    Display network and reference clock I/O statistics.

                                                                    -
                                                                    kerninfo
                                                                    +
                                                                    kerninfo

                                                                    Display kernel loop and PPS statistics. As with other ntpq output, times are in milliseconds. The precision value displayed is in milliseconds as well, unlike the precision system variable.

                                                                    -
                                                                    lassociations
                                                                    +
                                                                    lassociations

                                                                    Perform the same function as the associations command, except display mobilized and unmobilized associations.

                                                                    -
                                                                    monstats
                                                                    +
                                                                    monstats

                                                                    Display monitor facility statistics.

                                                                    -
                                                                    mrulist [limited | kod | mincount=count | laddr=localaddr | sort=sortorder | resany=hexmask | resall=hexmask]
                                                                    +
                                                                    mrulist [limited | kod | mincount=count | laddr=localaddr | sort=sortorder | resany=hexmask | resall=hexmask]

                                                                    Obtain and print traffic counts collected and maintained by the monitor facility. -With the exception of sort=sortorder, -the options filter the list returned by ntpd. -The limited and kod options return only entries +With the exception of sort=sortorder, +the options filter the list returned by ntpd. +The limited and kod options return only entries representing client addresses from which the last packet received triggered either discarding or a KoD response. -The mincount=count option filters entries representing -less than count packets. -The laddr=localaddr option filters entries for packets -received on any local address other than localaddr. -resany=hexmask and resall=hexmask +The mincount=count option filters entries representing +less than count packets. +The laddr=localaddr option filters entries for packets +received on any local address other than localaddr. +resany=hexmask and resall=hexmask filter entries containing none or less than all, respectively, -of the bits in hexmask, which must begin with 0x. +of the bits in hexmask, which must begin with 0x.
                                                                    -The sortorder defaults to lstint and may be any of -addr, count, avgint, lstint, or +The sortorder defaults to lstint and may be any of +addr, count, avgint, lstint, or any of those preceded by a minus sign (hyphen) to reverse the sort order. The output columns are:

                                                                    - +
                                                                    - - - + + - - - - - - + + + + +
                                                                    ColumnDescription
                                                                    lstintInterval in s between the receipt of the most recent packet from this -address and the completion of the retrieval of the MRU list by ntpq
                                                                    avgintAverage interval in s between packets from this address.
                                                                    rstrRestriction flags associated with this address. -Most are copied unchanged from the matching restrict command, +
                                                                    lstintInterval in s between the receipt of the most recent packet from this +address and the completion of the retrieval of the MRU list by ntpq
                                                                    avgintAverage interval in s between packets from this address.
                                                                    rstrRestriction flags associated with this address. +Most are copied unchanged from the matching restrict command, however 0x400 (kod) and 0x20 (limited) flags are cleared unless the last packet from this address triggered a rate control response.
                                                                    rRate control indicator, either a period, L or K for +
                                                                    rRate control indicator, either a period, L or K for no rate control response, rate limiting by discarding, or rate limiting with a KoD response, respectively.
                                                                    mPacket mode.
                                                                    vPacket version number.
                                                                    countPackets received from this address.
                                                                    rportSource port of last packet from this address.
                                                                    remote addressDNS name, numeric address, or address followed by claimed DNS name which +
                                                                    mPacket mode.
                                                                    vPacket version number.
                                                                    countPackets received from this address.
                                                                    rportSource port of last packet from this address.
                                                                    remote addressDNS name, numeric address, or address followed by claimed DNS name which could not be verified in parentheses.
                                                                    -
                                                                    mreadvar assocID assocID [ variable_name [ = value[ ... ]
                                                                    -
                                                                    mrv assocID assocID [ variable_name [ = value[ ... ]
                                                                    -

                                                                    Perform the same function as the readvar command, +

                                                                    mreadvar assocID assocID [ variable_name [ = value[ ... ]
                                                                    +
                                                                    mrv assocID assocID [ variable_name [ = value[ ... ]
                                                                    +

                                                                    Perform the same function as the readvar command, except for a range of association IDs. This range is determined from the association list cached by -the most recent associations command. +the most recent associations command.

                                                                    -
                                                                    passociations
                                                                    -

                                                                    Perform the same function as the associations command, except that +

                                                                    passociations
                                                                    +

                                                                    Perform the same function as the associations command, except that it uses previously stored data rather than making a new query.

                                                                    -
                                                                    peers
                                                                    +
                                                                    peers

                                                                    Display a list of peers in the form:
                                                                    -[tally]remote refid st t when pool reach delay offset jitter +[tally]remote refid st t when pool reach delay offset jitter

                                                                    - +
                                                                    - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + +
                                                                    VariableDescription
                                                                    [tally]single-character code indicating current value of the select field -of the peer status word.
                                                                    remotehost name (or IP number) of peer
                                                                    refidassociation ID or kiss code.
                                                                    ststratum
                                                                    tu: unicast or manycast client, -b: broadcast or multicast client, -l: local (reference clock), -s: symmetric (peer), -A: manycast server, -B: broadcast server, -M: multicast server.
                                                                    whensec/min/hr since last received packet
                                                                    pollpoll interval (log(2) s)
                                                                    reachreach shift register (octal)
                                                                    delayroundtrip delay
                                                                    offsetoffset of server relative to this host
                                                                    jitterjitter
                                                                    [tally]single-character code indicating current value of the select field +of the peer status word.
                                                                    remotehost name (or IP number) of peer
                                                                    refidassociation ID or kiss code.
                                                                    ststratum
                                                                    tu: unicast or manycast client, +b: broadcast or multicast client, +l: local (reference clock), +s: symmetric (peer), +A: manycast server, +B: broadcast server, +M: multicast server.
                                                                    whensec/min/hr since last received packet
                                                                    pollpoll interval (log(2) s)
                                                                    reachreach shift register (octal)
                                                                    delayroundtrip delay
                                                                    offsetoffset of server relative to this host
                                                                    jitterjitter
                                                                    -
                                                                    readvar assocID name [ = value ] [,...]
                                                                    -
                                                                    rv assocID [ name ] [,...]
                                                                    +
                                                                    readvar assocID name [ = value ] [,...]
                                                                    +
                                                                    rv assocID [ name ] [,...]

                                                                    Display the specified variables. -If assocID is zero, +If assocID is zero, the variables are from the ‘system variables’ name space, otherwise they are from the ‘peer variables’ name space. -The assocID is required, as the same name can occur in both spaces. -If no name is included, +The assocID is required, as the same name can occur in both spaces. +If no name is included, all operative variables in the name space are displayed. -In this case only, if the assocID is omitted, it is assumed zero. +In this case only, if the assocID is omitted, it is assumed zero. Multiple names are specified with comma separators and without whitespace. Note that time values are represented in milliseconds and frequency values in parts-per-million (PPM). @@ -1898,102 +1881,107 @@ where YYYY is the year, MM the month of year, DD the day of month and TTTT the time of day.

                                                                    -
                                                                    saveconfig filename
                                                                    +
                                                                    saveconfig filename

                                                                    Write the current configuration, including any runtime modifications -given with :config or config-from-file, -to the ntpd host’s file filename. +given with :config or config-from-file, +to the ntpd host’s file filename. This command will be rejected by the server unless -saveconfigdir -appears in the ntpd configuration file. -filename can use strftime() format specifiers +saveconfigdir +appears in the ntpd configuration file. +filename can use strftime() format specifiers to substitute the current date and time, for example, -saveconfig ntp-%Y%m%d-%H%M%S.conf. -The filename used is stored in system variable savedconfig. +saveconfig ntp-%Y%m%d-%H%M%S.conf. +The filename used is stored in system variable savedconfig. Authentication is required.

                                                                    -
                                                                    writevar assocID name = value [,...]
                                                                    +
                                                                    writevar assocID name = value [,...]

                                                                    Write the specified variables. -If the assocID is zero, the variables are from the +If the assocID is zero, the variables are from the ‘system variables’ name space, otherwise they are from the ‘peer variables’ name space. -The assocID is required, +The assocID is required, as the same name can occur in both spaces.

                                                                    -
                                                                    sysinfo
                                                                    +
                                                                    sysinfo

                                                                    Display operational summary.

                                                                    -
                                                                    sysstats
                                                                    +
                                                                    sysstats

                                                                    Print statistics counters maintained in the protocol module.


                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.5 Status Words and Kiss Codes

                                                                    +

                                                                    1.5 Status Words and Kiss Codes

                                                                    The current state of the operating program is shown in a set of status words maintained by the system and each association separately. -These words are displayed in the rv and as commands +These words are displayed in the rv and as commands both in hexadecimal and decoded short tip strings. The codes, tips and short explanations are on the -Event Messages and Status Words page. +Event Messages and Status Words page. The page also includes a list of system and peer messages, the code for the latest of which is included in the status word.

                                                                    Information resulting from protocol machine state transitions is displayed using an informal set of ASCII strings called -kiss codes. +kiss codes. The original purpose was for kiss-o’-death (KoD) packets sent by the server to advise the client of an unusual condition. They are now displayed, when appropriate, in the reference identifier field in various billboards.


                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.6 System Variables

                                                                    +

                                                                    1.6 System Variables

                                                                    -

                                                                    The following system variables appear in the rv billboard. +

                                                                    The following system variables appear in the rv billboard. Not all variables are displayed in some configurations.

                                                                    - +
                                                                    - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + +
                                                                    VariableDescription
                                                                    statussystem status word
                                                                    versionNTP software version and build time
                                                                    processorhardware platform and version
                                                                    systemoperating system and version
                                                                    leapleap warning indicator (0-3)
                                                                    stratumstratum (1-15)
                                                                    precisionprecision (log(2) s)
                                                                    rootdelaytotal roundtrip delay to the primary reference clock
                                                                    rootdisptotal dispersion to the primary reference clock
                                                                    peersystem peer association ID
                                                                    tc +
                                                                    statussystem status word
                                                                    versionNTP software version and build time
                                                                    processorhardware platform and version
                                                                    systemoperating system and version
                                                                    leapleap warning indicator (0-3)
                                                                    stratumstratum (1-15)
                                                                    precisionprecision (log(2) s)
                                                                    rootdelaytotal roundtrip delay to the primary reference clock
                                                                    rootdisptotal dispersion to the primary reference clock
                                                                    peersystem peer association ID
                                                                    tc time constant and poll exponent (log(2) s) (3-17)
                                                                    mintc +
                                                                    mintc minimum time constant (log(2) s) (3-10)
                                                                    clockdate and time of day
                                                                    refid -reference ID or kiss code
                                                                    reftimereference time
                                                                    offsetcombined offset of server relative to this host
                                                                    sys_jittercombined system jitter
                                                                    frequencyfrequency offset (PPM) relative to hardware clock
                                                                    clk_wanderclock frequency wander (PPM)
                                                                    clk_jitterclock jitter
                                                                    taiTAI-UTC offset (s)
                                                                    leapsecNTP seconds when the next leap second is/was inserted
                                                                    expireNTP seconds when the NIST leapseconds file expires
                                                                    clockdate and time of day
                                                                    refid +reference ID or kiss code
                                                                    reftimereference time
                                                                    offsetcombined offset of server relative to this host
                                                                    sys_jittercombined system jitter
                                                                    frequencyfrequency offset (PPM) relative to hardware clock
                                                                    clk_wanderclock frequency wander (PPM)
                                                                    clk_jitterclock jitter
                                                                    taiTAI-UTC offset (s)
                                                                    leapsecNTP seconds when the next leap second is/was inserted
                                                                    expireNTP seconds when the NIST leapseconds file expires

                                                                    The jitter and wander statistics are exponentially-weighted RMS averages. @@ -2004,57 +1992,61 @@ the clock jitter statistic is computed by the clock discipline module. additional system variables are displayed, including some or all of the following, depending on the particular Autokey dance:

                                                                    - +
                                                                    - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + +
                                                                    VariableDescription
                                                                    hostAutokey host name for this host
                                                                    identAutokey group name for this host
                                                                    flagshost flags (see Autokey specification)
                                                                    digestOpenSSL message digest algorithm
                                                                    signatureOpenSSL digest/signature scheme
                                                                    updateNTP seconds at last signature update
                                                                    certcertificate subject, issuer and certificate flags
                                                                    untilNTP seconds when the certificate expires
                                                                    hostAutokey host name for this host
                                                                    identAutokey group name for this host
                                                                    flagshost flags (see Autokey specification)
                                                                    digestOpenSSL message digest algorithm
                                                                    signatureOpenSSL digest/signature scheme
                                                                    updateNTP seconds at last signature update
                                                                    certcertificate subject, issuer and certificate flags
                                                                    untilNTP seconds when the certificate expires

                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.7 Peer Variables

                                                                    +

                                                                    1.7 Peer Variables

                                                                    -

                                                                    The following peer variables appear in the rv billboard +

                                                                    The following peer variables appear in the rv billboard for each association. Not all variables are displayed in some configurations.

                                                                    - +
                                                                    - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                                                                    VariableDescription
                                                                    associdassociation ID
                                                                    statuspeer status word
                                                                    srcadrsource (remote) IP address and port
                                                                    dstadrdestination (local) IP address and port
                                                                    leapleap indicator (0-3)
                                                                    stratumstratum (0-15)
                                                                    precisionprecision (log(2) s)
                                                                    rootdelaytotal roundtrip delay to the primary reference clock
                                                                    rootdisptotal root dispersion to the primary reference clock
                                                                    refidreference ID or kiss code
                                                                    reftimereference time
                                                                    reachreach register (octal)
                                                                    unreachunreach counter
                                                                    hmodehost mode (1-6)
                                                                    pmodepeer mode (1-5)
                                                                    hpollhost poll exponent (log(2) s) (3-17)
                                                                    ppollpeer poll exponent (log(2) s) (3-17)
                                                                    headwayheadway (see Rate Management and the Kiss-o’-Death Packet)
                                                                    flashflash status word
                                                                    offsetfilter offset
                                                                    delayfilter delay
                                                                    dispersionfilter dispersion
                                                                    jitterfilter jitter
                                                                    identAutokey group name for this association
                                                                    biasunicast/broadcast bias
                                                                    xleaveinterleave delay (see NTP Interleaved Modes)
                                                                    associdassociation ID
                                                                    statuspeer status word
                                                                    srcadrsource (remote) IP address and port
                                                                    dstadrdestination (local) IP address and port
                                                                    leapleap indicator (0-3)
                                                                    stratumstratum (0-15)
                                                                    precisionprecision (log(2) s)
                                                                    rootdelaytotal roundtrip delay to the primary reference clock
                                                                    rootdisptotal root dispersion to the primary reference clock
                                                                    refidreference ID or kiss code
                                                                    reftimereference time
                                                                    reachreach register (octal)
                                                                    unreachunreach counter
                                                                    hmodehost mode (1-6)
                                                                    pmodepeer mode (1-5)
                                                                    hpollhost poll exponent (log(2) s) (3-17)
                                                                    ppollpeer poll exponent (log(2) s) (3-17)
                                                                    headwayheadway (see Rate Management and the Kiss-o’-Death Packet)
                                                                    flashflash status word
                                                                    offsetfilter offset
                                                                    delayfilter delay
                                                                    dispersionfilter dispersion
                                                                    jitterfilter jitter
                                                                    identAutokey group name for this association
                                                                    biasunicast/broadcast bias
                                                                    xleaveinterleave delay (see NTP Interleaved Modes)

                                                                    The bias variable is calculated when the first broadcast packet is received @@ -2067,43 +2059,49 @@ packet.

                                                                    When the NTPv4 daemon is compiled with the OpenSSL software library, additional peer variables are displayed, including the following:

                                                                    - +
                                                                    - - - - - - - + + + + + + + +
                                                                    VariableDescription
                                                                    flagspeer flags (see Autokey specification)
                                                                    hostAutokey server name
                                                                    flagspeer flags (see Autokey specification)
                                                                    signatureOpenSSL digest/signature scheme
                                                                    initsequenceinitial key ID
                                                                    initkeyinitial key index
                                                                    timestampAutokey signature timestamp
                                                                    flagspeer flags (see Autokey specification)
                                                                    hostAutokey server name
                                                                    flagspeer flags (see Autokey specification)
                                                                    signatureOpenSSL digest/signature scheme
                                                                    initsequenceinitial key ID
                                                                    initkeyinitial key index
                                                                    timestampAutokey signature timestamp

                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.8 Clock Variables

                                                                    +

                                                                    1.8 Clock Variables

                                                                    -

                                                                    The following clock variables appear in the cv billboard for each association with a reference clock. Not all variables are displayed in some configurations. +

                                                                    The following clock variables appear in the cv billboard for each association with a reference clock. Not all variables are displayed in some configurations.

                                                                    - +
                                                                    - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                                                                    VariableDescription
                                                                    associdassociation ID
                                                                    statusclock status word
                                                                    devicedevice description
                                                                    timecodeASCII time code string (specific to device)
                                                                    pollpoll messages sent
                                                                    noreplyno reply
                                                                    badformatbad format
                                                                    baddatabad date or time
                                                                    fudgetime1fudge time 1
                                                                    fudgetime2fudge time 2
                                                                    stratumdriver stratum
                                                                    refiddriver reference ID
                                                                    flagsdriver flags
                                                                    associdassociation ID
                                                                    statusclock status word
                                                                    devicedevice description
                                                                    timecodeASCII time code string (specific to device)
                                                                    pollpoll messages sent
                                                                    noreplyno reply
                                                                    badformatbad format
                                                                    baddatabad date or time
                                                                    fudgetime1fudge time 1
                                                                    fudgetime2fudge time 2
                                                                    stratumdriver stratum
                                                                    refiddriver reference ID
                                                                    flagsdriver flags
                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    diff --git a/ntpq/ntpq.man.in b/ntpq/ntpq.man.in index 12c085baf..cbdeac782 100644 --- a/ntpq/ntpq.man.in +++ b/ntpq/ntpq.man.in @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntpq @NTPQ_MS@ "06 Jun 2023" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" +.TH ntpq @NTPQ_MS@ "07 Jan 2024" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:15 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:55 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpq-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME @@ -1585,7 +1585,7 @@ it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .SH "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .SH "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .SH "BUGS" Please send bug reports to: https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org diff --git a/ntpq/ntpq.mdoc.in b/ntpq/ntpq.mdoc.in index d5ace4c4f..520a852ba 100644 --- a/ntpq/ntpq.mdoc.in +++ b/ntpq/ntpq.mdoc.in @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTPQ @NTPQ_MS@ User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpq-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:10 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:51 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpq-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -1051,7 +1051,7 @@ it to autogen\-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .Sh "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .Sh "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .Sh "BUGS" Please send bug reports to: https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/invoke-ntpsnmpd.texi b/ntpsnmpd/invoke-ntpsnmpd.texi index 3f99a3f35..8a3d34859 100644 --- a/ntpsnmpd/invoke-ntpsnmpd.texi +++ b/ntpsnmpd/invoke-ntpsnmpd.texi @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ # # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (invoke-ntpsnmpd.texi) # -# It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:20 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +# It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:35:00 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 # From the definitions ntpsnmpd-opts.def # and the template file agtexi-cmd.tpl @end ignore @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ with a status code of 0. @exampleindent 0 @example -ntpsnmpd - NTP SNMP MIB agent - Ver. 4.2.8p16 +ntpsnmpd - NTP SNMP MIB agent - Ver. 4.2.8p17 Usage: ntpsnmpd [ - [] | --[@{=| @}] ]... Flg Arg Option-Name Description -n no nofork Do not fork diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.c b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.c index f13108da1..75975860f 100644 --- a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.c +++ b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.c @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* * EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpsnmpd-opts.c) * - * It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:17 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 + * It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:36:04 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 * From the definitions ntpsnmpd-opts.def * and the template file options * @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ * The ntpsnmpd program is copyrighted and licensed * under the following terms: * - * Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. + * Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. * This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and * redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which * can be seen at: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ extern FILE * option_usage_fp; */ static char const ntpsnmpd_opt_strs[1614] = /* 0 */ "ntpsnmpd 4.2.8p17\n" - "Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n" + "Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n" "This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n" "redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n" "can be seen at:\n" @@ -560,7 +560,7 @@ static void bogus_function(void) { */ /* referenced via ntpsnmpdOptions.pzCopyright */ puts(_("ntpsnmpd 4.2.8p17\n\ -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\ +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\ This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n\ redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n\ can be seen at:\n")); diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.h b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.h index d5239d2e3..d3af1d7cf 100644 --- a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.h +++ b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd-opts.h @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* * EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpsnmpd-opts.h) * - * It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:16 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 + * It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:36:04 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 * From the definitions ntpsnmpd-opts.def * and the template file options * @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ * The ntpsnmpd program is copyrighted and licensed * under the following terms: * - * Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. + * Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. * This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and * redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which * can be seen at: diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdman b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdman index 29f12c6c9..da5659b7e 100644 --- a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdman +++ b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdman @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntpsnmpd 1ntpsnmpdman "06 Jun 2023" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" +.TH ntpsnmpd 1ntpsnmpdman "07 Jan 2024" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:21 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:35:01 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpsnmpd-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .NOP "Heiko Gerstung" .br .SH "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .SH "BUGS" Please send bug reports to: https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdmdoc b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdmdoc index be353c746..2f902b845 100644 --- a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdmdoc +++ b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.1ntpsnmpdmdoc @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTPSNMPD 1ntpsnmpdmdoc User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpsnmpd-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:18 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:58 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpsnmpd-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ it to autogen\-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .Sh AUTHORS .An "Heiko Gerstung" .Sh "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .Sh "BUGS" Please send bug reports to: https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.html b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.html index e31de98c7..665d3a70c 100644 --- a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.html +++ b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ - + - + ntpsnmpd: Network Time Protocol SNMP Daemon User’s Manual @@ -10,24 +10,17 @@ + + + + @@ -35,65 +28,59 @@ ul.no-bullet {list-style: none} -

                                                                    ntpsnmpd: Network Time Protocol SNMP Daemon User’s Manual

                                                                    - -

                                                                    Short Table of Contents

                                                                    - - - -
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    ntpsnmpd: Network Time Protocol Query User Manual

                                                                    +

                                                                    ntpsnmpd: Network Time Protocol Query User Manual

                                                                    -

                                                                    The ntpsnmpd utility program is used to monitor NTP daemon ntpd +

                                                                    The ntpsnmpd utility program is used to monitor NTP daemon ntpd operations and determine performance. It uses the standard NTP mode 6 control

                                                                    -

                                                                    This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntpsnmpd. +

                                                                    This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntpsnmpd.

                                                                    - - - - - +
                                                                    +

                                                                    Short Table of Contents

                                                                    + + +

                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1 Description

                                                                    +

                                                                    1 Description

                                                                    -

                                                                    The ntpsnmpd utility program provides an SNMP MIB agent for ntpd. +

                                                                    The ntpsnmpd utility program provides an SNMP MIB agent for ntpd.

                                                                    - - - - +
                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.1 Usage

                                                                    +

                                                                    1.1 Usage

                                                                    (what should we say here?) -


                                                                    +

                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.man.in b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.man.in index 7080d07b3..ecdde647f 100644 --- a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.man.in +++ b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.man.in @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntpsnmpd @NTPSNMPD_MS@ "06 Jun 2023" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" +.TH ntpsnmpd @NTPSNMPD_MS@ "07 Jan 2024" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:21 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:35:01 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpsnmpd-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .NOP "Heiko Gerstung" .br .SH "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .SH "BUGS" Please send bug reports to: https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org diff --git a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.mdoc.in b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.mdoc.in index b0f89d34b..2d1da65fa 100644 --- a/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.mdoc.in +++ b/ntpsnmpd/ntpsnmpd.mdoc.in @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTPSNMPD @NTPSNMPD_MS@ User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpsnmpd-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:18 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:34:58 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpsnmpd-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ it to autogen\-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .Sh AUTHORS .An "Heiko Gerstung" .Sh "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .Sh "BUGS" Please send bug reports to: https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org diff --git a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjman b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjman index e1d2216c3..6994a9858 100644 --- a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjman +++ b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjman @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH calc_tickadj 1calc_tickadjman "06 Jun 2023" "ntp (4.2.8p17)" "User Commands" +.TH calc_tickadj 1calc_tickadjman "06 Jan 2024" "ntp (4.2.8p17)" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:39:10 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 6, 2024 at 03:50:36 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions calc_tickadj-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME diff --git a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjmdoc b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjmdoc index 71507c329..ea4283372 100644 --- a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjmdoc +++ b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.1calc_tickadjmdoc @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt CALC_TICKADJ 1calc_tickadjmdoc User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (calc_tickadj-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:39:12 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:32:50 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions calc_tickadj-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME diff --git a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.html b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.html index fb583099b..f5c0d9bd0 100644 --- a/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.html +++ b/scripts/calc_tickadj/calc_tickadj.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ - + calc_tickadj User’s Manual @@ -16,14 +16,23 @@ + Ntp-wait User’s Manual @@ -10,24 +10,17 @@ + + + @@ -35,117 +28,95 @@ ul.no-bullet {list-style: none} -

                                                                    Ntp-wait User’s Manual

                                                                    -
                                                                    + -

                                                                    Top

                                                                    +

                                                                    Top

                                                                    -

                                                                    This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s ntp-wait program. +

                                                                    This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s ntp-wait program.

                                                                    If there are time-sensitive applications, the proper sequence of events is to -run ntpd -g as early as possible, +run ntpd -g as early as possible, then invoke all of the non-time-sensitive process, -run ntp-wait to block +run ntp-wait to block until the system’s time has stabilized and synchronized, and only then start any applicaitons (like database servers) that require accurate and stable time.

                                                                    -

                                                                    This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntp-wait. +

                                                                    This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntp-wait.

                                                                    - -

                                                                    Short Table of Contents

                                                                    - - - - - - -
                                                                    -
                                                                    -

                                                                    -Up: Top  

                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1 Invoking ntp-wait

                                                                    - - +

                                                                    1 Invoking ntp-wait

                                                                    + + -

                                                                    ntp-wait +

                                                                    ntp-wait will send at most -num-tries +num-tries queries to -ntpd(8), +ntpd(8), sleeping for -secs-between-tries +secs-between-tries after each status return that says -ntpd(8) +ntpd(8) has not yet produced a synchronized and stable system clock.

                                                                    -

                                                                    ntp-wait +

                                                                    ntp-wait will do this quietly, unless the --v +-v flag is provided. This can be useful at boot time, to delay the boot sequence until after -ntpd -g +ntpd -g has set the time.

                                                                    -

                                                                    This section was generated by AutoGen, -using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntp-wait program. +

                                                                    This section was generated by AutoGen, +using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntp-wait program.

                                                                    - - - - - - - - - +
                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.1 ntp-wait help/usage (--help)

                                                                    - +

                                                                    1.1 ntp-wait help/usage (--help)

                                                                    +

                                                                    This is the automatically generated usage text for ntp-wait.

                                                                    -

                                                                    The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option -(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print +

                                                                    The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option +(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. -more-help is disabled on platforms without a working -fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is -used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit +more-help is disabled on platforms without a working +fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is +used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

                                                                    -
                                                                    ntp-wait - Wait for ntpd to stabilize the system clock - Ver. 4.2.8p17
                                                                    +
                                                                    ntp-wait - Wait for ntpd to stabilize the system clock - Ver. 4.2.8p17
                                                                     USAGE: ntp-wait [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... 
                                                                     
                                                                         -n, --tries=num              Number of times to check ntpd
                                                                    @@ -159,69 +130,82 @@ hyphen and the flag character.
                                                                     

                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.2 tries option (-n)

                                                                    - +

                                                                    1.2 tries option (-n)

                                                                    +

                                                                    This is the “number of times to check ntpd” option. This option takes a number argument. - The maximum number of times we will check ntpd to see if + The maximum number of times we will check ntpd to see if it has been able to synchronize and stabilize the system clock.


                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.3 sleep option (-s)

                                                                    - +

                                                                    1.3 sleep option (-s)

                                                                    +

                                                                    This is the “how long to sleep between tries” option. -This option takes a number argument secs-between-tries. - We will sleep for secs-between-tries after each query - of ntpd that returns "the time is not yet stable". +This option takes a number argument secs-between-tries. + We will sleep for secs-between-tries after each query + of ntpd that returns "the time is not yet stable".


                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.4 verbose option (-v)

                                                                    - +

                                                                    1.4 verbose option (-v)

                                                                    +

                                                                    This is the “be verbose” option. - By default, ntp-wait is silent. - With this option, ntp-wait will provide status information. + By default, ntp-wait is silent. + With this option, ntp-wait will provide status information.


                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.5 ntp-wait exit status

                                                                    +

                                                                    1.5 ntp-wait exit status

                                                                    One of the following exit values will be returned: -

                                                                    -
                                                                    0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
                                                                    +

                                                                    +
                                                                    0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

                                                                    Successful program execution.

                                                                    -
                                                                    1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
                                                                    +
                                                                    1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

                                                                    The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.


                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.6 ntp-wait Authors

                                                                    +

                                                                    1.6 ntp-wait Authors


                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + +

                                                                    1.7 ntp-wait Notes

                                                                    +
                                                                    -

                                                                    1.7 ntp-wait Notes

                                                                    -
                                                                    diff --git a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.man.in b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.man.in index 4e9b184b8..70bf96b4d 100644 --- a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.man.in +++ b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.man.in @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntp-wait @NTP_WAIT_MS@ "06 Jun 2023" "ntp (4.2.8p17)" "User Commands" +.TH ntp-wait @NTP_WAIT_MS@ "06 Jan 2024" "ntp (4.2.8p17)" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:39:18 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 6, 2024 at 03:50:39 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntp-wait-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME diff --git a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.mdoc.in b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.mdoc.in index 35e7a2ab0..388aaf1a9 100644 --- a/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.mdoc.in +++ b/scripts/ntp-wait/ntp-wait.mdoc.in @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTP_WAIT @NTP_WAIT_MS@ User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp-wait-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:39:15 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:32:52 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntp-wait-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME diff --git a/scripts/ntpsweep/invoke-ntpsweep.texi b/scripts/ntpsweep/invoke-ntpsweep.texi index d81aa76d2..0e1011f00 100644 --- a/scripts/ntpsweep/invoke-ntpsweep.texi +++ b/scripts/ntpsweep/invoke-ntpsweep.texi @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ # # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (invoke-ntpsweep.texi) # -# It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:39:20 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +# It has been AutoGen-ed January 6, 2024 at 03:50:47 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 # From the definitions ntpsweep-opts.def # and the template file agtexi-cmd.tpl @end ignore diff --git a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep-opts b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep-opts index 61bfb3415..f302000e8 100644 --- a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep-opts +++ b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep-opts @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpsweep-opts) # -# It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:39:20 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +# It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:32:55 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 # From the definitions ntpsweep-opts.def # and the template file perlopt diff --git a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepman b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepman index e609f5412..486848a6a 100644 --- a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepman +++ b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepman @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntpsweep 1ntpsweepman "06 Jun 2023" "ntp (4.2.8p17)" "User Commands" +.TH ntpsweep 1ntpsweepman "06 Jan 2024" "ntp (4.2.8p17)" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:39:23 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 6, 2024 at 03:50:44 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpsweep-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME diff --git a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepmdoc b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepmdoc index 37b9e81f2..def7b9e64 100644 --- a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepmdoc +++ b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.1ntpsweepmdoc @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 6 2024 .Dt NTPSWEEP 1ntpsweepmdoc User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntpsweep-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:39:22 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 6, 2024 at 03:50:45 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntpsweep-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME diff --git a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.html b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.html index bca4b0298..f82d380d2 100644 --- a/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.html +++ b/scripts/ntpsweep/ntpsweep.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ - + ntpsweep User’s Manual @@ -16,14 +16,23 @@ + Ntptrace User’s Manual @@ -10,24 +10,17 @@ + + + @@ -35,48 +28,43 @@ ul.no-bullet {list-style: none} -

                                                                    Ntptrace User’s Manual

                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    Simple Network Time Protocol User Manual

                                                                    +

                                                                    Simple Network Time Protocol User Manual

                                                                    -

                                                                    This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s ntptrace program. -This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntptrace. +

                                                                    This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s ntptrace program. +This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntptrace.

                                                                    - + + +

                                                                    Short Table of Contents

                                                                    - - - - - - - +

                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1 Invoking ntptrace

                                                                    - - +

                                                                    1 Invoking ntptrace

                                                                    + + -

                                                                    ntptrace is a perl script that uses the ntpq utility program to follow +

                                                                    ntptrace is a perl script that uses the ntpq utility program to follow the chain of NTP servers from a given host back to the primary time source. For ntptrace to work properly, each of these servers must implement the NTP Control and Monitoring Protocol specified in RFC 1305 and enable NTP Mode 6 packets. @@ -85,14 +73,14 @@ and Monitoring Protocol specified in RFC 1305 and enable NTP Mode 6 packets. the output from ntptrace:

                                                                    -
                                                                    % ntptrace localhost: stratum 4, offset 0.0019529, synch distance 0.144135
                                                                    +
                                                                    % ntptrace localhost: stratum 4, offset 0.0019529, synch distance 0.144135
                                                                     server2ozo.com: stratum 2, offset 0.0124263, synch distance 0.115784 usndh.edu:
                                                                     stratum 1, offset 0.0019298, synch distance 0.011993, refid 'WWVB'
                                                                     

                                                                    On each line, the fields are (left to right): the host name, the host stratum, the time offset between that host and the local host (as measured by -ntptrace; this is why it is not always zero for "localhost"), the host +ntptrace; this is why it is not always zero for "localhost"), the host synchronization distance, and (only for stratum-1 servers) the reference clock ID. All times are given in seconds. Note that the stratum is the server hop count to the primary source, while the synchronization distance is the @@ -100,42 +88,34 @@ estimated error relative to the primary source. These terms are precisely defined in RFC-1305.

                                                                    -

                                                                    This section was generated by AutoGen, -using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntptrace program. +

                                                                    This section was generated by AutoGen, +using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntptrace program.

                                                                    - - - - - - - +
                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.1 ntptrace help/usage (--help)

                                                                    - +

                                                                    1.1 ntptrace help/usage (--help)

                                                                    +

                                                                    This is the automatically generated usage text for ntptrace.

                                                                    -

                                                                    The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option -(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print +

                                                                    The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option +(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. -more-help is disabled on platforms without a working -fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is -used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit +more-help is disabled on platforms without a working +fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is +used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

                                                                    -
                                                                    ntptrace - Trace peers of an NTP server - Ver. 4.2.8p17
                                                                    +
                                                                    ntptrace - Trace peers of an NTP server - Ver. 4.2.8p17
                                                                     USAGE: ntptrace [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... [host]
                                                                     
                                                                         -n, --numeric                Print IP addresses instead of hostnames
                                                                    @@ -148,67 +128,72 @@ Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
                                                                     hyphen and the flag character.
                                                                     
                                                                    - - - - - - - +
                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.1.1 numeric option (-n)

                                                                    - +

                                                                    1.1.1 numeric option (-n)

                                                                    +

                                                                    This is the “print ip addresses instead of hostnames” option. Output hosts as dotted-quad numeric format rather than converting to the canonical host names.


                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.1.2 max-hosts option (-m)

                                                                    - +

                                                                    1.1.2 max-hosts option (-m)

                                                                    +

                                                                    This is the “maximum number of peers to trace” option. This option takes a number argument. -This option has no ‘doc’ documentation. +This option has no ‘doc’ documentation.


                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.1.3 host option (-r)

                                                                    - +

                                                                    1.1.3 host option (-r)

                                                                    +

                                                                    This is the “single remote host” option. This option takes a string argument. -This option has no ‘doc’ documentation. +This option has no ‘doc’ documentation.


                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.1.4 ntptrace exit status

                                                                    +

                                                                    1.1.4 ntptrace exit status

                                                                    One of the following exit values will be returned: -

                                                                    -
                                                                    0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
                                                                    +

                                                                    +
                                                                    0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

                                                                    Successful program execution.

                                                                    -
                                                                    1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
                                                                    +
                                                                    1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

                                                                    The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    diff --git a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.man.in b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.man.in index db4e5ab6c..4977fe386 100644 --- a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.man.in +++ b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.man.in @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntptrace @NTPTRACE_MS@ "06 Jun 2023" "ntp (4.2.8p17)" "User Commands" +.TH ntptrace @NTPTRACE_MS@ "06 Jan 2024" "ntp (4.2.8p17)" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:39:28 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 6, 2024 at 03:50:48 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntptrace-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME diff --git a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.mdoc.in b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.mdoc.in index 1d64345f1..1282e500a 100644 --- a/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.mdoc.in +++ b/scripts/ntptrace/ntptrace.mdoc.in @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTPTRACE @NTPTRACE_MS@ User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntptrace-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:39:25 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:32:55 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntptrace-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME diff --git a/scripts/plot_summary-opts b/scripts/plot_summary-opts index 10e2fdfae..6e64e2efa 100644 --- a/scripts/plot_summary-opts +++ b/scripts/plot_summary-opts @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (plot_summary-opts) # -# It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:39:35 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +# It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:33:00 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 # From the definitions plot_summary-opts.def # and the template file perlopt diff --git a/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summaryman b/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summaryman index 14bc32021..3fa10fa61 100644 --- a/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summaryman +++ b/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summaryman @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH plot_summary 1plot_summaryman "06 Jun 2023" "ntp (4.2.8p17)" "User Commands" +.TH plot_summary 1plot_summaryman "06 Jan 2024" "ntp (4.2.8p17)" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:39:37 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 6, 2024 at 03:50:28 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions plot_summary-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME diff --git a/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summarymdoc b/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summarymdoc index 338e8e5de..36e680073 100644 --- a/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summarymdoc +++ b/scripts/plot_summary.1plot_summarymdoc @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 6 2024 .Dt PLOT_SUMMARY 1plot_summarymdoc User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (plot_summary-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:39:38 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 6, 2024 at 03:50:30 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions plot_summary-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME diff --git a/scripts/plot_summary.html b/scripts/plot_summary.html index fc944c708..4be5622f5 100644 --- a/scripts/plot_summary.html +++ b/scripts/plot_summary.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ - + Plot_summary User’s Manual @@ -16,14 +16,23 @@ + Summary User’s Manual @@ -16,14 +16,23 @@ + update-leap User’s Manual @@ -16,14 +16,23 @@ + Sntp User’s Manual @@ -10,24 +10,19 @@ + + + + @@ -35,60 +30,53 @@ ul.no-bullet {list-style: none} -

                                                                    Sntp User’s Manual

                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    Simple Network Time Protocol User Manual

                                                                    +

                                                                    Simple Network Time Protocol User Manual

                                                                    -

                                                                    This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s sntp program, +

                                                                    This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s sntp program, that can be used to query a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server and display the time offset of the system clock relative to the server clock. Run as root, it can correct the system clock to this offset as well. It can be run as an interactive command or from a cron job.

                                                                    -

                                                                    This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of sntp. +

                                                                    This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of sntp.

                                                                    The program implements the SNTP protocol as defined by RFC 5905, the NTPv4 IETF specification.

                                                                    - + + +

                                                                    Short Table of Contents

                                                                    - - - - - - - - +

                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1 Description

                                                                    +

                                                                    1 Description

                                                                    -

                                                                    By default, sntp writes the local data and time (i.e., not UTC) to the +

                                                                    By default, sntp writes the local data and time (i.e., not UTC) to the standard output in the format:

                                                                    -
                                                                    1996-10-15 20:17:25.123 (+0800) +4.567 +/- 0.089 secs
                                                                    +
                                                                    1996-10-15 20:17:25.123 (+0800) +4.567 +/- 0.089 secs
                                                                     

                                                                    where @@ -98,29 +86,27 @@ and the +4.567 +/- 0.089 secs indicates the time offset and error bound of the system clock relative to the server clock.

                                                                    - - - - - +
                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.1 Invoking sntp

                                                                    - - +

                                                                    1.1 Invoking sntp

                                                                    + + -

                                                                    sntp +

                                                                    sntp can be used as an SNTP client to query a NTP or SNTP server and either display the time or set the local system’s time (given suitable privilege). It can be run as an interactive command or from a -cron +cron job.

                                                                    NTP (the Network Time Protocol) and SNTP (the Simple Network Time Protocol) @@ -130,103 +116,85 @@ are defined and described by RFC 5905.

                                                                    The default is to write the estimated correct local date and time (i.e. not UTC) to the standard output in a format like:

                                                                    -

                                                                    '1996-10-15 20:17:25.123 (+0800) +4.567 +/- 0.089 [host] IP sN' +

                                                                    '1996-10-15 20:17:25.123 (+0800) +4.567 +/- 0.089 [host] IP sN'

                                                                    where the -'(+0800)' +'(+0800)' means that to get to UTC from the reported local time one must add 8 hours and 0 minutes, the -'+4.567' +'+4.567' indicates the local clock is 4.567 seconds behind the correct time (so 4.567 seconds must be added to the local clock to get it to be correct). Note that the number of decimals printed for this value will change based on the reported precision of the server. -'+/- 0.089' +'+/- 0.089' is the reported -synchronization distance +synchronization distance (in seconds), which represents the maximum error due to all causes. If the server does not report valid data needed to calculate the synchronization distance, this will be reported as -'+/- ?'. +'+/- ?'. If the -host +host is different from the -IP, +IP, both will be displayed. Otherwise, only the -IP +IP is displayed. Finally, the -stratum +stratum of the host is reported and the leap indicator is decoded and displayed.

                                                                    -

                                                                    This section was generated by AutoGen, -using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the sntp program. +

                                                                    This section was generated by AutoGen, +using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the sntp program. This software is released under the NTP license, <http://ntp.org/license>.

                                                                    - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +
                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.1.1 sntp help/usage (--help)

                                                                    - +

                                                                    1.1.1 sntp help/usage (--help)

                                                                    +

                                                                    This is the automatically generated usage text for sntp.

                                                                    -

                                                                    The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option -(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print +

                                                                    The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option +(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. -more-help is disabled on platforms without a working -fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is -used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit +more-help is disabled on platforms without a working +fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is +used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

                                                                    -
                                                                    sntp - standard Simple Network Time Protocol client program - Ver. 4.2.8p17
                                                                    +
                                                                    sntp - standard Simple Network Time Protocol client program - Ver. 4.2.8p17
                                                                     Usage:  sntp [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... \
                                                                                     [ hostname-or-IP ...]
                                                                       Flg Arg Option-Name    Description
                                                                    @@ -281,248 +249,278 @@ Please send bug reports to:  <https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org>
                                                                     

                                                                    -
                                                                    +
                                                                    +
                                                                    + -

                                                                    1.1.2 ipv4 option (-4)

                                                                    - +

                                                                    1.1.2 ipv4 option (-4)

                                                                    +

                                                                    This is the “force ipv4 dns name resolution” option.

                                                                    This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                                                      -
                                                                    • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                                                                        +
                                                                      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: ipv6.

                                                                      Force DNS resolution of the following host names on the command line to the IPv4 namespace.


                                                                      -
                                                                      +
                                                                      +
                                                                      + -

                                                                      1.1.3 ipv6 option (-6)

                                                                      - +

                                                                      1.1.3 ipv6 option (-6)

                                                                      +

                                                                      This is the “force ipv6 dns name resolution” option.

                                                                      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                                                        -
                                                                      • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: +

                                                                          +
                                                                        • must not appear in combination with any of the following options: ipv4.

                                                                        Force DNS resolution of the following host names on the command line to the IPv6 namespace.


                                                                        -
                                                                        +
                                                                        +
                                                                        + -

                                                                        1.1.4 authentication option (-a)

                                                                        - +

                                                                        1.1.4 authentication option (-a)

                                                                        + -

                                                                        This is the “enable authentication with the key auth-keynumber” option. -This option takes a number argument auth-keynumber. +

                                                                        This is the “enable authentication with the key auth-keynumber” option. +This option takes a number argument auth-keynumber. Enable authentication using the key specified in this option’s -argument. The argument of this option is the keyid, a -number specified in the keyfile as this key’s identifier. -See the keyfile option (-k) for more details. +argument. The argument of this option is the keyid, a +number specified in the keyfile as this key’s identifier. +See the keyfile option (-k) for more details.


                                                                        -
                                                                        +
                                                                        +
                                                                        + -

                                                                        1.1.5 broadcast option (-b)

                                                                        - +

                                                                        1.1.5 broadcast option (-b)

                                                                        +

                                                                        This is the “listen to the address specified for broadcast time sync” option. -This option takes a string argument broadcast-address. +This option takes a string argument broadcast-address.

                                                                        This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                                                          -
                                                                        • may appear an unlimited number of times. +

                                                                            +
                                                                          • may appear an unlimited number of times.
                                                                          -

                                                                          If specified sntp will listen to the specified address +

                                                                          If specified sntp will listen to the specified address for NTP broadcasts. The default maximum wait time -can (and probably should) be modified with -t. +can (and probably should) be modified with -t.


                                                                          -
                                                                          +
                                                                          +
                                                                          + -

                                                                          1.1.6 concurrent option (-c)

                                                                          - +

                                                                          1.1.6 concurrent option (-c)

                                                                          +

                                                                          This is the “concurrently query all ips returned for host-name” option. -This option takes a string argument host-name. +This option takes a string argument host-name.

                                                                          This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                                                            -
                                                                          • may appear an unlimited number of times. +

                                                                              +
                                                                            • may appear an unlimited number of times.

                                                                            Requests from an NTP "client" to a "server" should never be sent more rapidly than one every 2 seconds. By default, any IPs returned as part of a DNS lookup are assumed to be for a single instance of -ntpd, and therefore sntp will send queries to these IPs +ntpd, and therefore sntp will send queries to these IPs one after another, with a 2-second gap in between each query.

                                                                            -

                                                                            The -c or --concurrent flag says that any IPs +

                                                                            The -c or --concurrent flag says that any IPs returned for the DNS lookup of the supplied host-name are on different machines, so we can send concurrent queries.


                                                                            -
                                                                            +
                                                                            +
                                                                            + -

                                                                            1.1.7 gap option (-g)

                                                                            - +

                                                                            1.1.7 gap option (-g)

                                                                            +

                                                                            This is the “the gap (in milliseconds) between time requests” option. -This option takes a number argument milliseconds. +This option takes a number argument milliseconds. Since we’re only going to use the first valid response we get and there is benefit to specifying a good number of servers to query, separate the queries we send out by the specified number of milliseconds.


                                                                            -
                                                                            +
                                                                            +
                                                                            + -

                                                                            1.1.8 kod option (-K)

                                                                            - +

                                                                            1.1.8 kod option (-K)

                                                                            +

                                                                            This is the “kod history filename” option. -This option takes a file argument file-name. +This option takes a file argument file-name. Specifies the filename to be used for the persistent history of KoD responses received from servers. If the file does not exist, a warning message will be displayed. The file will not be created.


                                                                            -
                                                                            +
                                                                            +
                                                                            + -

                                                                            1.1.9 keyfile option (-k)

                                                                            - +

                                                                            1.1.9 keyfile option (-k)

                                                                            + -

                                                                            This is the “look in this file for the key specified with -a” option. -This option takes a file argument file-name. +

                                                                            This is the “look in this file for the key specified with -a” option. +This option takes a file argument file-name. This option specifies the keyfile. -sntp will search for the key specified with -a -keyno in this file. See ntp.keys(5) for more +sntp will search for the key specified with -a +keyno in this file. See ntp.keys(5) for more information.


                                                                            -
                                                                            +
                                                                            +
                                                                            + -

                                                                            1.1.10 logfile option (-l)

                                                                            - +

                                                                            1.1.10 logfile option (-l)

                                                                            +

                                                                            This is the “log to specified logfile” option. -This option takes a file argument file-name. +This option takes a file argument file-name. This option causes the client to write log messages to the specified -logfile. +logfile.


                                                                            -
                                                                            +
                                                                            +
                                                                            + -

                                                                            1.1.11 steplimit option (-M)

                                                                            - +

                                                                            1.1.11 steplimit option (-M)

                                                                            + -

                                                                            This is the “adjustments less than steplimit msec will be slewed” option. +

                                                                            This is the “adjustments less than steplimit msec will be slewed” option. This option takes a number argument. -If the time adjustment is less than steplimit milliseconds, -slew the amount using adjtime(2). Otherwise, step the -correction using settimeofday(2). The default value is 0, +If the time adjustment is less than steplimit milliseconds, +slew the amount using adjtime(2). Otherwise, step the +correction using settimeofday(2). The default value is 0, which means all adjustments will be stepped. This is a feature, as different situations demand different values.


                                                                            -
                                                                            +
                                                                            +
                                                                            + -

                                                                            1.1.12 ntpversion option (-o)

                                                                            - +

                                                                            1.1.12 ntpversion option (-o)

                                                                            + -

                                                                            This is the “send int as our ntp protocol version” option. +

                                                                            This is the “send int as our ntp protocol version” option. This option takes a number argument. When sending requests to a remote server, tell them we are running -NTP protocol version ntpversion . +NTP protocol version ntpversion .


                                                                            -
                                                                            +
                                                                            +
                                                                            + -

                                                                            1.1.13 usereservedport option (-r)

                                                                            - +

                                                                            1.1.13 usereservedport option (-r)

                                                                            +

                                                                            This is the “use the ntp reserved port (port 123)” option. Use port 123, which is reserved for NTP, for our network communications.


                                                                            -
                                                                            +
                                                                            +
                                                                            + -

                                                                            1.1.14 timeout option (-t)

                                                                            - +

                                                                            1.1.14 timeout option (-t)

                                                                            +

                                                                            This is the “the number of seconds to wait for responses” option. -This option takes a number argument seconds. -When waiting for a reply, sntp will wait the number +This option takes a number argument seconds. +When waiting for a reply, sntp will wait the number of seconds specified before giving up. The default should be -more than enough for a unicast response. If sntp is +more than enough for a unicast response. If sntp is only waiting for a broadcast response a longer timeout is likely needed.


                                                                            -
                                                                            +
                                                                            +
                                                                            + -

                                                                            1.1.15 wait option

                                                                            - +

                                                                            1.1.15 wait option

                                                                            +

                                                                            This is the “wait for pending replies (if not setting the time)” option.

                                                                            This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                                                              -
                                                                            • can be disabled with –no-wait. -
                                                                            • It is enabled by default. +

                                                                                +
                                                                              • can be disabled with –no-wait. +
                                                                              • It is enabled by default.

                                                                              If we are not setting the time, wait for all pending responses.


                                                                              -
                                                                              +
                                                                              +
                                                                              + -

                                                                              1.1.16 presetting/configuring sntp

                                                                              +

                                                                              1.1.16 presetting/configuring sntp

                                                                              -

                                                                              Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by -loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named SNTP and SNTP_<OPTION_NAME>. <OPTION_NAME> must be one of +

                                                                              Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by +loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named SNTP and SNTP_<OPTION_NAME>. <OPTION_NAME> must be one of the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores. -The SNTP variable will be tokenized and parsed like +The SNTP variable will be tokenized and parsed like the command line. The remaining variables are tested for existence and their values are treated like option arguments.

                                                                              -

                                                                              libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files: -

                                                                                -
                                                                              • $HOME -
                                                                              • $PWD +

                                                                                libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files: +

                                                                                  +
                                                                                • $HOME +
                                                                                • $PWD
                                                                                -

                                                                                The environment variables HOME, and PWD -are expanded and replaced when sntp runs. +

                                                                                The environment variables HOME, and PWD +are expanded and replaced when sntp runs. For any of these that are plain files, they are simply processed. -For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for +For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for within that directory and processed.

                                                                                Configuration files may be in a wide variety of formats. @@ -535,110 +533,121 @@ lines by escaping the newline with a backslash. Common options are collected at the top, followed by program specific segments. The segments are separated by lines like:

                                                                                -
                                                                                [SNTP]
                                                                                +
                                                                                [SNTP]
                                                                                 

                                                                                or by

                                                                                -
                                                                                <?program sntp>
                                                                                +
                                                                                <?program sntp>
                                                                                 

                                                                                Do not mix these styles within one configuration file.

                                                                                Compound values and carefully constructed string values may also be specified using XML syntax:

                                                                                -
                                                                                <option-name>
                                                                                +
                                                                                <option-name>
                                                                                    <sub-opt>...&lt;...&gt;...</sub-opt>
                                                                                 </option-name>
                                                                                 
                                                                                -

                                                                                yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of +

                                                                                yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of

                                                                                -
                                                                                "...<...>..."
                                                                                +
                                                                                "...<...>..."
                                                                                 
                                                                                -

                                                                                AutoOpts does not track suboptions. You simply note that it is a -hierarchicly valued option. AutoOpts does provide a means for searching +

                                                                                AutoOpts does not track suboptions. You simply note that it is a +hierarchicly valued option. AutoOpts does provide a means for searching the associated name/value pair list (see: optionFindValue).

                                                                                The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are:

                                                                                -

                                                                                version (-)

                                                                                +

                                                                                version (-)

                                                                                Print the program version to standard out, optionally with licensing information, then exit 0. The optional argument specifies how much licensing detail to provide. The default is to print just the version. The licensing information may be selected with an option argument. Only the first letter of the argument is examined:

                                                                                -
                                                                                -
                                                                                version
                                                                                +
                                                                                +
                                                                                version

                                                                                Only print the version. This is the default.

                                                                                -
                                                                                copyright
                                                                                +
                                                                                copyright

                                                                                Name the copyright usage licensing terms.

                                                                                -
                                                                                verbose
                                                                                +
                                                                                verbose

                                                                                Print the full copyright usage licensing terms.


                                                                                -
                                                                                +
                                                                                +
                                                                                + -

                                                                                1.1.17 sntp exit status

                                                                                +

                                                                                1.1.17 sntp exit status

                                                                                One of the following exit values will be returned: -

                                                                                -
                                                                                0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
                                                                                +

                                                                                +
                                                                                0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

                                                                                Successful program execution.

                                                                                -
                                                                                1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
                                                                                +
                                                                                1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

                                                                                The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

                                                                                -
                                                                                66 (EX_NOINPUT)
                                                                                +
                                                                                66 (EX_NOINPUT)

                                                                                A specified configuration file could not be loaded.

                                                                                -
                                                                                70 (EX_SOFTWARE)
                                                                                +
                                                                                70 (EX_SOFTWARE)

                                                                                libopts had an internal operational error. Please report it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you.


                                                                                -
                                                                                +
                                                                                +
                                                                                + -

                                                                                1.1.18 sntp Usage

                                                                                +

                                                                                1.1.18 sntp Usage


                                                                                -
                                                                                +
                                                                                +
                                                                                + -

                                                                                1.1.19 sntp Authors

                                                                                +

                                                                                1.1.19 sntp Authors


                                                                                -
                                                                                +
                                                                                +
                                                                                +
                                                                                + -

                                                                                1.2 Usage

                                                                                +

                                                                                1.2 Usage

                                                                                The simplest use of this program is as an unprivileged command to check the current time, offset, and error in the local clock. For example:

                                                                                -
                                                                                sntp ntpserver.somewhere
                                                                                +
                                                                                sntp ntpserver.somewhere
                                                                                 

                                                                                With suitable privilege, it can be run as a command or in a -crom job to reset the local clock from a reliable server, like -the ntpdate and rdate commands. +crom job to reset the local clock from a reliable server, like +the ntpdate and rdate commands. For example:

                                                                                -
                                                                                sntp -a ntpserver.somewhere
                                                                                +
                                                                                sntp -a ntpserver.somewhere
                                                                                 
                                                                                -
                                                                                +
                                                                                +
                                                                                +
                                                                                diff --git a/sntp/sntp.man.in b/sntp/sntp.man.in index ca4ddea8e..ba9df3e6d 100644 --- a/sntp/sntp.man.in +++ b/sntp/sntp.man.in @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH sntp @SNTP_MS@ "06 Jun 2023" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" +.TH sntp @SNTP_MS@ "07 Jan 2024" "4.2.8p17" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:36:14 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:33:46 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions sntp-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .NOP "Dave Hart" .br .SH "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .SH "BUGS" Please send bug reports to: https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org diff --git a/sntp/sntp.mdoc.in b/sntp/sntp.mdoc.in index 3e5fa3377..e09fd3f03 100644 --- a/sntp/sntp.mdoc.in +++ b/sntp/sntp.mdoc.in @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt SNTP @SNTP_MS@ User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (sntp-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:36:10 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:33:42 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions sntp-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ it to autogen\-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .An "Harlan Stenn" .An "Dave Hart" .Sh "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .Sh "BUGS" Please send bug reports to: https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org diff --git a/util/Makefile.am b/util/Makefile.am index cef623c59..065fdf547 100644 --- a/util/Makefile.am +++ b/util/Makefile.am @@ -4,7 +4,8 @@ bin_PROGRAMS= $(NTP_KEYGEN_DB) $(NTPTIME_DB) $(TICKADJ_DB) $(TIMETRIM_DB) libexec_PROGRAMS= $(NTP_KEYGEN_DL) $(NTPTIME_DL) $(TICKADJ_DL) $(TIMETRIM_DL) sbin_PROGRAMS= $(NTP_KEYGEN_DS) $(NTPTIME_DS) $(TICKADJ_DS) $(TIMETRIM_DS) -EXTRA_PROGRAMS= audio-pcm byteorder hist jitter kern longsize ntp-keygen \ +EXTRA_PROGRAMS= audio-pcm byteorder hist jitter kern longsize lsf-times \ + ntp-keygen \ ntptime pps-api precision sht testrs6000 tg tg2 tickadj timetrim AM_CFLAGS = $(CFLAGS_NTP) diff --git a/util/invoke-ntp-keygen.texi b/util/invoke-ntp-keygen.texi index 2ee45b309..104691ee4 100644 --- a/util/invoke-ntp-keygen.texi +++ b/util/invoke-ntp-keygen.texi @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ # # EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (invoke-ntp-keygen.texi) # -# It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:29 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +# It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:35:07 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 # From the definitions ntp-keygen-opts.def # and the template file agtexi-cmd.tpl @end ignore diff --git a/util/ntp-keygen-opts.c b/util/ntp-keygen-opts.c index fb3c78fdf..1556aae44 100644 --- a/util/ntp-keygen-opts.c +++ b/util/ntp-keygen-opts.c @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* * EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp-keygen-opts.c) * - * It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:24 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 + * It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:36:07 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 * From the definitions ntp-keygen-opts.def * and the template file options * @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ * The ntp-keygen program is copyrighted and licensed * under the following terms: * - * Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. + * Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. * This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and * redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which * can be seen at: @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ extern FILE * option_usage_fp; */ static char const ntp_keygen_opt_strs[2443] = /* 0 */ "ntp-keygen (ntp) 4.2.8p17\n" - "Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n" + "Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n" "This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n" "redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n" "can be seen at:\n" @@ -1315,7 +1315,7 @@ static void bogus_function(void) { */ /* referenced via ntp_keygenOptions.pzCopyright */ puts(_("ntp-keygen (ntp) 4.2.8p17\n\ -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\ +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved.\n\ This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and\n\ redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which\n\ can be seen at:\n")); diff --git a/util/ntp-keygen-opts.h b/util/ntp-keygen-opts.h index 9e266d2b1..1b578f056 100644 --- a/util/ntp-keygen-opts.h +++ b/util/ntp-keygen-opts.h @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* * EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp-keygen-opts.h) * - * It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:23 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 + * It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:36:07 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 * From the definitions ntp-keygen-opts.def * and the template file options * @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ * The ntp-keygen program is copyrighted and licensed * under the following terms: * - * Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. + * Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation, all rights reserved. * This is free software. It is licensed for use, modification and * redistribution under the terms of the NTP License, copies of which * can be seen at: diff --git a/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenman b/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenman index f96a7689b..03ac272a8 100644 --- a/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenman +++ b/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenman @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntp-keygen 1ntp-keygenman "06 Jun 2023" "ntp (4.2.8p17)" "User Commands" +.TH ntp-keygen 1ntp-keygenman "07 Jan 2024" "ntp (4.2.8p17)" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:32 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:35:09 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntp-keygen-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME @@ -1351,7 +1351,7 @@ it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .SH "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .SH "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .SH BUGS It can take quite a while to generate some cryptographic values. diff --git a/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenmdoc b/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenmdoc index ce6b988d7..a46ff94d4 100644 --- a/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenmdoc +++ b/util/ntp-keygen.1ntp-keygenmdoc @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTP_KEYGEN 1ntp-keygenmdoc User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp-keygen-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:27 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:35:05 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntp-keygen-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -1208,7 +1208,7 @@ it to autogen\-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .Sh "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .Sh "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .Sh BUGS It can take quite a while to generate some cryptographic values. diff --git a/util/ntp-keygen.html b/util/ntp-keygen.html index 0d16b09b5..e99e9d1e8 100644 --- a/util/ntp-keygen.html +++ b/util/ntp-keygen.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ - + - + Ntp-keygen User’s Manual @@ -10,24 +10,20 @@ + + + + @@ -35,42 +31,21 @@ ul.no-bullet {list-style: none} -

                                                                                Ntp-keygen User’s Manual

                                                                                - - -

                                                                                Short Table of Contents

                                                                                - - - - - - - - - -
                                                                                +
                                                                                + -

                                                                                NTP Key Generation Program User Manual

                                                                                +

                                                                                NTP Key Generation Program User Manual

                                                                                -

                                                                                This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s ntp-keygen +

                                                                                This document describes the use of the NTP Project’s ntp-keygen program, that generates cryptographic data files used by the NTPv4 authentication and identity schemes. It can generate message digest keys used in symmetric key cryptography and, @@ -84,19 +59,24 @@ All other files are in PEM-encoded printable ASCII format so they can be embedded as MIME attachments in mail to other sites.

                                                                                -

                                                                                This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntp-keygen. +

                                                                                This document applies to version 4.2.8p17 of ntp-keygen.

                                                                                - - - +
                                                                                +

                                                                                Short Table of Contents

                                                                                + +

                                                                                -
                                                                                +
                                                                                + -

                                                                                1 Description

                                                                                +

                                                                                1 Description

                                                                                This program generates cryptographic data files used by the NTPv4 authentication and identity schemes. It can generate message digest @@ -130,12 +110,12 @@ However, the identity keys are probably not compatible with anything other than Autokey.

                                                                                Some files used by this program are encrypted using a private password. -The -p option specifies the password for local encrypted files and the --q option the password for encrypted files sent to remote sites. +The -p option specifies the password for local encrypted files and the +-q option the password for encrypted files sent to remote sites. If no password is specified, the host name returned by the Unix -gethostname() function, normally the DNS name of the host, is used. +gethostname() function, normally the DNS name of the host, is used.

                                                                                -

                                                                                The pw option of the crypto configuration command +

                                                                                The pw option of the crypto configuration command specifies the read password for previously encrypted local files. This must match the local password used by this program. If not specified, the host name is used. @@ -146,47 +126,43 @@ host.

                                                                                Normally, encrypted files for each host are generated by that host and used only by that host, although exceptions exist as noted later on this page. -The symmetric keys file, normally called ntp.keys, is -usually installed in /etc. +The symmetric keys file, normally called ntp.keys, is +usually installed in /etc. Other files and links are usually installed -in /usr/local/etc, which is normally in a shared filesystem in +in /usr/local/etc, which is normally in a shared filesystem in NFS-mounted networks and cannot be changed by shared clients. The location of the keys directory can be changed by the keysdir configuration command in such cases. -Normally, this is in /etc. +Normally, this is in /etc.

                                                                                This program directs commentary and error messages to the standard -error stream stderr and remote files to the standard output stream -stdout where they can be piped to other applications or redirected to +error stream stderr and remote files to the standard output stream +stdout where they can be piped to other applications or redirected to files. The names used for generated files and links all begin with the -string ntpkey and include the file type, +string ntpkey and include the file type, generating host and filestamp, -as described in the Cryptographic Data Files section below. -

                                                                                - - - - - - - +as described in the Cryptographic Data Files section below. +

                                                                                +
                                                                                -
                                                                                +
                                                                                + -

                                                                                1.1 Running the Program

                                                                                +

                                                                                1.1 Running the Program

                                                                                To test and gain experience with Autokey concepts, log in as root and -change to the keys directory, usually /usr/local/etc. +change to the keys directory, usually /usr/local/etc. When run for the -first time, or if all files with names beginning ntpkey] have been -removed, use the ntp-keygen command without arguments to generate a +first time, or if all files with names beginning ntpkey] have been +removed, use the ntp-keygen command without arguments to generate a default RSA host key and matching RSA-MD5 certificate with expiration date one year hence. If run again without options, the program uses the @@ -194,8 +170,8 @@ existing keys and parameters and generates only a new certificate with new expiration date one year hence.

                                                                                Run the command on as many hosts as necessary. -Designate one of them as the trusted host (TH) using ntp-keygen -with the -T option and configure +Designate one of them as the trusted host (TH) using ntp-keygen +with the -T option and configure it to synchronize from reliable Internet servers. Then configure the other hosts to synchronize to the TH directly or indirectly. A certificate trail is created when Autokey asks the immediately @@ -206,12 +182,12 @@ All group hosts should have acyclic certificate trails ending on the TH.

                                                                                The host key is used to encrypt the cookie when required and so must be RSA type. By default, the host key is also the sign key used to encrypt signatures. -A different sign key can be assigned using the -S option +A different sign key can be assigned using the -S option and this can be either RSA or DSA type. By default, the signature message digest type is MD5, but any combination of sign key type and message digest type supported by the OpenSSL library can be specified -using the -c option. +using the -c option.

                                                                                The rules say cryptographic media should be generated with proventic filestamps, which means the host should already be synchronized before @@ -228,13 +204,15 @@ certificate should be re-generated. Autokey Public-Key Authentication page.


                                                                                -
                                                                                +
                                                                                +
                                                                                + -

                                                                                1.2 Invoking ntp-keygen

                                                                                - - +

                                                                                1.2 Invoking ntp-keygen

                                                                                + + @@ -266,9 +244,9 @@ The message digest symmetric keys file must be distributed and stored using secure means beyond the scope of NTP itself. Besides the keys used for ordinary NTP associations, additional keys can be defined as passwords for the -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) utility programs.

                                                                                The remaining generated files are compatible with other OpenSSL @@ -281,16 +259,16 @@ other than Autokey.

                                                                                Some files used by this program are encrypted using a private password. The --p +-p option specifies the read password for local encrypted files and the --q +-q option the write password for encrypted files sent to remote sites. If no password is specified, the host name returned by the Unix -hostname(1) +hostname(1) command, normally the DNS name of the host, is used as the the default read password, for convenience. The -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen program prompts for the password if it reads an encrypted file and the password is missing or incorrect. If an encrypted file is read successfully and @@ -298,17 +276,17 @@ no write password is specified, the read password is used as the write password by default.

                                                                                The -pw +pw option of the -crypto -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +crypto +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) configuration command specifies the read password for previously encrypted local files. This must match the local read password used by this program. If not specified, the host name is used. Thus, if files are generated by this program without an explicit password, they can be read back by -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) without specifying an explicit password but only on the same host. If the write password used for encryption is specified as the host name, these files can be read by that host with no explicit password. @@ -317,111 +295,87 @@ these files can be read by that host with no explicit password. used only by that host, although exceptions exist as noted later on this page. The symmetric keys file, normally called -ntp.keys, +ntp.keys, is usually installed in -/etc. +/etc. Other files and links are usually installed in -/usr/local/etc, +/usr/local/etc, which is normally in a shared filesystem in NFS-mounted networks and cannot be changed by shared clients. In these cases, NFS clients can specify the files in another directory such as -/etc +/etc using the -keysdir -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +keysdir +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) configuration file command.

                                                                                This program directs commentary and error messages to the standard error stream -stderr +stderr and remote files to the standard output stream -stdout +stdout where they can be piped to other applications or redirected to files. The names used for generated files and links all begin with the string -ntpkey* +ntpkey* and include the file type, generating host and filestamp, as described in the -Cryptographic Data Files +Cryptographic Data Files section below.

                                                                                - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

                                                                                1.2.1 Running the Program

                                                                                + +
                                                                                +

                                                                                1.2.1 Running the Program

                                                                                The safest way to run the -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen program is logged in directly as root. The recommended procedure is change to the -keys +keys directory, usually -/usr/local/etc, +/usr/local/etc, then run the program.

                                                                                To test and gain experience with Autokey concepts, log in as root and change to the -keys +keys directory, usually -/usr/local/etc. +/usr/local/etc. When run for the first time, or if all files with names beginning with -ntpkey* +ntpkey* have been removed, use the -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen command without arguments to generate a default -RSA +RSA host key and matching -RSA-MD5 +RSA-MD5 certificate file with expiration date one year hence, which is all that is necessary in many cases. The program also generates soft links from the generic names @@ -431,35 +385,35 @@ existing keys and parameters and generates a new certificate file with new expiration date one year hence, and soft link.

                                                                                The host key is used to encrypt the cookie when required and so must be -RSA +RSA type. By default, the host key is also the sign key used to encrypt signatures. When necessary, a different sign key can be specified and this can be either -RSA +RSA or -DSA +DSA type. By default, the message digest type is -MD5, +MD5, but any combination of sign key type and message digest type supported by the OpenSSL library can be specified, including those using the -AES128CMAC, MD2, MD5, MDC2, SHA, SHA1 +AES128CMAC, MD2, MD5, MDC2, SHA, SHA1 and -RIPE160 +RIPE160 message digest algorithms. However, the scheme specified in the certificate must be compatible with the sign key. Certificates using any digest algorithm are compatible with -RSA +RSA sign keys; however, only -SHA +SHA and -SHA1 +SHA1 certificates are compatible with -DSA +DSA sign keys.

                                                                                Private/public key files and certificates are compatible with @@ -471,29 +425,29 @@ However, the identification parameter files, although encoded as the other files, are probably not compatible with anything other than Autokey.

                                                                                Running the program as other than root and using the Unix -su(1) +su(1) command to assume root may not work properly, since by default the OpenSSL library looks for the random seed file -.rnd +.rnd in the user home directory. However, there should be only one -.rnd, +.rnd, most conveniently in the root directory, so it is convenient to define the .Ev RANDFILE environment variable used by the OpenSSL library as the path to -.rnd. +.rnd.

                                                                                Installing the keys as root might not work in NFS-mounted shared file systems, as NFS clients may not be able to write to the shared keys directory, even as root. In this case, NFS clients can specify the files in another directory such as -/etc +/etc using the -keysdir -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +keysdir +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) configuration file command. There is no need for one client to read the keys and certificates of other clients or servers, as these data are obtained automatically @@ -510,7 +464,7 @@ The owner name is also used for the host and sign key files, while the trusted name is used for the identity files.

                                                                                All files are installed by default in the keys directory -/usr/local/etc, +/usr/local/etc, which is normally in a shared filesystem in NFS-mounted networks. The actual location of the keys directory @@ -528,9 +482,9 @@ Alternatively, files containing private values can be encrypted and these files permitted world readable, which simplifies maintenance in shared file systems. Since uniqueness is insured by the -hostname +hostname and -filestamp +filestamp file name extensions, the files for an NTP server and dependent clients can all be installed in the same shared directory.

                                                                                @@ -541,29 +495,29 @@ to the generated files. This allows new file generations to be activated simply by changing the link. If a link is present, -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) follows it to the file name to extract the -filestamp. +filestamp. If a link is not present, -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) extracts the -filestamp +filestamp from the file itself. This allows clients to verify that the file and generation times are always current. The -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen program uses the same -filestamp +filestamp extension for all files generated at one time, so each generation is distinct and can be readily recognized in monitoring data.

                                                                                Run the command on as many hosts as necessary. Designate one of them as the trusted host (TH) using -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen with the --T +-T option and configure it to synchronize from reliable Internet servers. Then configure the other hosts to synchronize to the TH directly or indirectly. @@ -577,19 +531,19 @@ RSA type. By default, the host key is also the sign key used to encrypt signatures. A different sign key can be assigned using the --S +-S option and this can be either -RSA +RSA or -DSA +DSA type. By default, the signature message digest type is -MD5, +MD5, but any combination of sign key type and message digest type supported by the OpenSSL library can be specified using the --c +-c option.

                                                                                The rules say cryptographic media should be generated with proventic @@ -608,43 +562,51 @@ certificate should be re-generated. page.

                                                                                File names begin with the prefix -ntpkey_ +ntpkey_ and end with the suffix -_hostname. filestamp, +_hostname. filestamp, where -hostname +hostname is the owner name, usually the string returned by the Unix -hostname(1) +hostname(1) command, and -filestamp +filestamp is the NTP seconds when the file was generated, in decimal digits. This both guarantees uniqueness and simplifies maintenance procedures, since all files can be quickly removed by a -rm ntpkey* +rm ntpkey* command or all files generated at a specific time can be removed by a -rm *filestamp +rm *filestamp command. To further reduce the risk of misconfiguration, the first two lines of a file contain the file name and generation date and time as comments.

                                                                                -

                                                                                1.2.1.1 Trusted Hosts and Groups

                                                                                + +
                                                                                +

                                                                                1.2.1.1 Trusted Hosts and Groups

                                                                                Each cryptographic configuration involves selection of a signature scheme and identification scheme, called a cryptotype, as explained in the ‘Authentication Options’ section of -ntp.conf(5). +ntp.conf(5). The default cryptotype uses -RSA +RSA encryption, -MD5 +MD5 message digest and -TC +TC identification. First, configure a NTP subnet including one or more low-stratum trusted hosts from which all other hosts derive synchronization @@ -659,18 +621,18 @@ The trail is defined by static configuration file entries or dynamic means described on the ‘Automatic NTP Configuration Options’ section of -ntp.conf(5). +ntp.conf(5).

                                                                                On each trusted host as root, change to the keys directory. To insure a fresh fileset, remove all -ntpkey +ntpkey files. Then run -ntp-keygen --T +ntp-keygen +-T to generate keys and a trusted certificate. On all other hosts do the same, but leave off the --T +-T flag to generate keys and nontrusted certificates. When complete, start the NTP daemons beginning at the lowest stratum and working up the tree. @@ -679,56 +641,58 @@ throughout the subnet, but setting up the environment is completely automatic.

                                                                                If it is necessary to use a different sign key or different digest/signature scheme than the default, run -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen with the --S type +-S type option, where -type +type is either -RSA +RSA or -DSA. +DSA. The most frequent need to do this is when a -DSA-signed +DSA-signed certificate is used. If it is necessary to use a different certificate scheme than the default, run -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen with the --c scheme +-c scheme option and selected -scheme +scheme as needed. If -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen is run again without these options, it generates a new certificate using the same scheme and sign key, and soft link.

                                                                                After setting up the environment it is advisable to update certificates from time to time, if only to extend the validity interval. Simply run -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen with the same flags as before to generate new certificates using existing keys, and soft links. However, if the host or sign key is changed, -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) should be restarted. When -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) is restarted, it loads any new files and restarts the protocol. Other dependent hosts will continue as usual until signatures are refreshed, at which time the protocol is restarted.

                                                                                -

                                                                                1.2.1.2 Identity Schemes

                                                                                +
                                                                                +
                                                                                +

                                                                                1.2.1.2 Identity Schemes

                                                                                As mentioned on the Autonomous Authentication page, the default -TC +TC identity scheme is vulnerable to a middleman attack. However, there are more secure identity schemes available, including -PC, IFF, GQ +PC, IFF, GQ and -MV +MV schemes described below. These schemes are based on a TA, one or more trusted hosts and some number of nontrusted hosts. @@ -750,22 +714,22 @@ only as clients have key files that contain only client keys.

                                                                                The PC scheme supports only one trusted host in the group. On trusted host alice run -ntp-keygen --P --p password +ntp-keygen +-P +-p password to generate the host key file -ntpkey_ RSA key_alice. filestamp +ntpkey_ RSA key_alice. filestamp and trusted private certificate file -ntpkey_ RSA-MD5 _ cert_alice. filestamp, +ntpkey_ RSA-MD5 _ cert_alice. filestamp, and soft links. Copy both files to all group hosts; they replace the files which would be generated in other schemes. On each host -bob +bob install a soft link from the generic name -ntpkey_host_bob +ntpkey_host_bob to the host key file and soft link -ntpkey_cert_bob +ntpkey_cert_bob to the private certificate file. Note the generic links are on bob, but point to files generated by trusted host alice. @@ -774,30 +738,30 @@ either the keys or certificates without copying them to all other hosts in the group, and recreating the soft links.

                                                                                For the -IFF +IFF scheme proceed as in the -TC +TC scheme to generate keys and certificates for all group hosts, then for every trusted host in the group, generate the -IFF +IFF parameter file. On trusted host alice run -ntp-keygen --T --I --p password +ntp-keygen +-T +-I +-p password to produce her parameter file -ntpkey_IFFpar_alice.filestamp, +ntpkey_IFFpar_alice.filestamp, which includes both server and client keys. Copy this file to all group hosts that operate as both servers and clients and install a soft link from the generic -ntpkey_iff_alice +ntpkey_iff_alice to this file. If there are no hosts restricted to operate only as clients, there is nothing further to do. As the -IFF +IFF scheme is independent of keys and certificates, these files can be refreshed as needed.

                                                                                @@ -806,78 +770,78 @@ as a legitimate server and present a middleman threat. To eliminate this threat, the client keys can be extracted from the parameter file and distributed to all restricted clients. After generating the parameter file, on alice run -ntp-keygen --e +ntp-keygen +-e and pipe the output to a file or email program. Copy or email this file to all restricted clients. On these clients install a soft link from the generic -ntpkey_iff_alice +ntpkey_iff_alice to this file. To further protect the integrity of the keys, each file can be encrypted with a secret password.

                                                                                For the -GQ +GQ scheme proceed as in the -TC +TC scheme to generate keys and certificates for all group hosts, then for every trusted host in the group, generate the -IFF +IFF parameter file. On trusted host alice run -ntp-keygen --T --G --p password +ntp-keygen +-T +-G +-p password to produce her parameter file -ntpkey_GQpar_alice.filestamp, +ntpkey_GQpar_alice.filestamp, which includes both server and client keys. Copy this file to all group hosts and install a soft link from the generic -ntpkey_gq_alice +ntpkey_gq_alice to this file. In addition, on each host -bob +bob install a soft link from generic -ntpkey_gq_bob +ntpkey_gq_bob to this file. As the -GQ +GQ scheme updates the -GQ +GQ parameters file and certificate at the same time, keys and certificates can be regenerated as needed.

                                                                                For the -MV +MV scheme, proceed as in the -TC +TC scheme to generate keys and certificates for all group hosts. For illustration assume trish is the TA, alice one of several trusted hosts and bob one of her clients. On TA trish run -ntp-keygen --V n --p password, +ntp-keygen +-V n +-p password, where -n +n is the number of revokable keys (typically 5) to produce the parameter file -ntpkeys_MVpar_trish.filestamp +ntpkeys_MVpar_trish.filestamp and client key files -ntpkeys_MVkeyd _ trish. filestamp +ntpkeys_MVkeyd _ trish. filestamp where -d +d is the key number (0 < -d +d < -n). +n). Copy the parameter file to alice and install a soft link from the generic -ntpkey_mv_alice +ntpkey_mv_alice to this file. Copy one of the client key files to alice for later distribution to her clients. @@ -885,240 +849,244 @@ It does not matter which client key file goes to alice, since they all work the same way. Alice copies the client key file to all of her clients. On client bob install a soft link from generic -ntpkey_mvkey_bob +ntpkey_mvkey_bob to the client key file. As the -MV +MV scheme is independent of keys and certificates, these files can be refreshed as needed.

                                                                                -

                                                                                1.2.1.3 Command Line Options

                                                                                -
                                                                                -
                                                                                -b --imbits= modulus
                                                                                +
                                                                                +
                                                                                +

                                                                                1.2.1.3 Command Line Options

                                                                                +
                                                                                +
                                                                                -b --imbits= modulus

                                                                                Set the number of bits in the identity modulus for generating identity keys to -modulus +modulus bits. The number of bits in the identity modulus defaults to 256, but can be set to values from 256 to 2048 (32 to 256 octets). Use the larger moduli with caution, as this can consume considerable computing resources and increases the size of authenticated packets.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -c --certificate= scheme
                                                                                +
                                                                                -c --certificate= scheme

                                                                                Select certificate signature encryption/message digest scheme. The -scheme +scheme can be one of the following: -RSA-MD2, RSA-MD5, RSA-MDC2, RSA-SHA, RSA-SHA1, RSA-RIPEMD160, DSA-SHA, +RSA-MD2, RSA-MD5, RSA-MDC2, RSA-SHA, RSA-SHA1, RSA-RIPEMD160, DSA-SHA, or -DSA-SHA1. +DSA-SHA1. Note that -RSA +RSA schemes must be used with an -RSA +RSA sign key and -DSA +DSA schemes must be used with a -DSA +DSA sign key. The default without this option is -RSA-MD5. +RSA-MD5. If compatibility with FIPS 140-2 is required, either the -DSA-SHA +DSA-SHA or -DSA-SHA1 +DSA-SHA1 scheme must be used.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -C --cipher= cipher
                                                                                +
                                                                                -C --cipher= cipher

                                                                                Select the OpenSSL cipher to encrypt the files containing private keys. The default without this option is three-key triple DES in CBC mode, -des-ede3-cbc. +des-ede3-cbc. The -openssl -h +openssl -h command provided with OpenSSL displays available ciphers.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -d --debug-level
                                                                                +
                                                                                -d --debug-level

                                                                                Increase debugging verbosity level. This option displays the cryptographic data produced in eye-friendly billboards.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -D --set-debug-level= level
                                                                                +
                                                                                -D --set-debug-level= level

                                                                                Set the debugging verbosity to -level. +level. This option displays the cryptographic data produced in eye-friendly billboards.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -e --id-key
                                                                                +
                                                                                -e --id-key

                                                                                Write the -IFF +IFF or -GQ +GQ public parameters from the -IFFkey or GQkey +IFFkey or GQkey client keys file previously specified as unencrypted data to the standard output stream -stdout. +stdout. This is intended for automatic key distribution by email.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -G --gq-params
                                                                                +
                                                                                -G --gq-params

                                                                                Generate a new encrypted -GQ +GQ parameters and key file for the Guillou-Quisquater (GQ) identity scheme. This option is mutually exclusive with the --I +-I and --V +-V options.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -H --host-key
                                                                                +
                                                                                -H --host-key

                                                                                Generate a new encrypted -RSA +RSA public/private host key file.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -I --iffkey
                                                                                +
                                                                                -I --iffkey

                                                                                Generate a new encrypted -IFF +IFF key file for the Schnorr (IFF) identity scheme. This option is mutually exclusive with the --G +-G and Fl V options.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -i --ident= group
                                                                                +
                                                                                -i --ident= group

                                                                                Set the optional Autokey group name to -group. +group. This is used in the identity scheme parameter file names of -IFF, GQ, +IFF, GQ, and -MV +MV client parameters files. In that role, the default is the host name if no group is provided. The group name, if specified using --i +-i or --s +-s following an ‘@’ character, is also used in certificate subject and issuer names in the form -host @ group +host @ group and should match the group specified via -crypto ident +crypto ident or -server ident +server ident in the ntpd configuration file.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -l --lifetime= days
                                                                                +
                                                                                -l --lifetime= days

                                                                                Set the lifetime for certificate expiration to -days. +days. The default lifetime is one year (365 days).

                                                                                -
                                                                                -m --modulus= bits
                                                                                +
                                                                                -m --modulus= bits

                                                                                Set the number of bits in the prime modulus for generating files to -bits. +bits. The modulus defaults to 512, but can be set from 256 to 2048 (32 to 256 octets). Use the larger moduli with caution, as this can consume considerable computing resources and increases the size of authenticated packets.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -M --md5key
                                                                                +
                                                                                -M --md5key

                                                                                Generate a new symmetric keys file containing 10 -MD5 +MD5 keys, and if OpenSSL is available, 10 -SHA +SHA keys. An -MD5 +MD5 key is a string of 20 random printable ASCII characters, while a -SHA +SHA key is a string of 40 random hex digits. The file can be edited using a text editor to change the key type or key content. This option is mutually exclusive with all other options.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -p --password= passwd
                                                                                +
                                                                                -p --password= passwd

                                                                                Set the password for reading and writing encrypted files to -passwd. +passwd. These include the host, sign and identify key files. By default, the password is the string returned by the Unix -hostname +hostname command.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -P --pvt-cert
                                                                                +
                                                                                -P --pvt-cert

                                                                                Generate a new private certificate used by the -PC +PC identity scheme. By default, the program generates public certificates. Note: the PC identity scheme is not recommended for new installations.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -q --export-passwd= passwd
                                                                                +
                                                                                -q --export-passwd= passwd

                                                                                Set the password for writing encrypted -IFF, GQ and MV +IFF, GQ and MV identity files redirected to -stdout +stdout to -passwd. +passwd. In effect, these files are decrypted with the --p +-p password, then encrypted with the --q +-q password. By default, the password is the string returned by the Unix -hostname +hostname command.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -s --subject-key= [host] [@ group]
                                                                                +
                                                                                -s --subject-key= [host] [@ group]

                                                                                Specify the Autokey host name, where -host +host is the optional host name and -group +group is the optional group name. The host name, and if provided, group name are used in -host @ group +host @ group form as certificate subject and issuer. Specifying --s -@ group +-s -@ group is allowed, and results in leaving the host name unchanged, as with --i group. +-i group. The group name, or if no group is provided, the host name are also used in the file names of -IFF, GQ, +IFF, GQ, and -MV +MV identity scheme client parameter files. If -host +host is not specified, the default host name is the string returned by the Unix -hostname +hostname command.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -S --sign-key= [RSA | DSA]
                                                                                +
                                                                                -S --sign-key= [RSA | DSA]

                                                                                Generate a new encrypted public/private sign key file of the specified type. By default, the sign key is the host key and has the same type. If compatibility with FIPS 140-2 is required, the sign key type must be -DSA. +DSA.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -T --trusted-cert
                                                                                +
                                                                                -T --trusted-cert

                                                                                Generate a trusted certificate. By default, the program generates a non-trusted certificate.

                                                                                -
                                                                                -V --mv-params nkeys
                                                                                +
                                                                                -V --mv-params nkeys

                                                                                Generate -nkeys +nkeys encrypted server keys and parameters for the Mu-Varadharajan (MV) identity scheme. This option is mutually exclusive with the --I +-I and --G +-G options. Note: support for this option should be considered a work in progress.

                                                                                -

                                                                                1.2.1.4 Random Seed File

                                                                                +
                                                                                +
                                                                                +

                                                                                1.2.1.4 Random Seed File

                                                                                All cryptographically sound key generation schemes must have means to randomize the entropy seed used to initialize the internal pseudo-random number generator used by the library routines. The OpenSSL library uses a designated random seed file for this purpose. The file must be available when starting the NTP daemon and -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen program. If a site supports OpenSSL or its companion OpenSSH, it is very likely that means to do this are already available. @@ -1133,19 +1101,19 @@ but are outside the scope of this page.

                                                                                The entropy seed used by the OpenSSL library is contained in a file, usually called -.rnd, +.rnd, which must be available when starting the NTP daemon or the -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen program. The NTP daemon will first look for the file using the path specified by the -randfile +randfile subcommand of the -crypto +crypto configuration command. If not specified in this way, or when starting the -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen program, the OpenSSL library will look for the file using the path specified by the @@ -1156,48 +1124,50 @@ If the .Ev RANDFILE environment variable is not present, the library will look for the -.rnd +.rnd file in the user home directory. Since both the -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen program and -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) daemon must run as root, the logical place to put this file is in -/.rnd +/.rnd or -/root/.rnd. +/root/.rnd. If the file is not available or cannot be written, the daemon exits with a message to the system log and the program exits with a suitable error message.

                                                                                -

                                                                                1.2.1.5 Cryptographic Data Files

                                                                                +
                                                                                +
                                                                                +

                                                                                1.2.1.5 Cryptographic Data Files

                                                                                All file formats begin with two nonencrypted lines. The first line contains the file name, including the generated host name and filestamp, in the format -ntpkey_key _ name. filestamp, +ntpkey_key _ name. filestamp, where -key +key is the key or parameter type, -name +name is the host or group name and -filestamp +filestamp is the filestamp (NTP seconds) when the file was created. By convention, -key +key names in generated file names include both upper and lower case characters, while -key +key names in generated link names include only lower case characters. The filestamp is not used in generated link names. The second line contains the datestamp in conventional Unix -date +date format. Lines beginning with ‘#’ are considered comments and ignored by the -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen program and -ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) +ntpd(1ntpdmdoc) daemon.

                                                                                The remainder of the file contains cryptographic data, encoded first using ASN.1 @@ -1205,7 +1175,7 @@ rules, then encrypted if necessary, and finally written in PEM-encoded printable ASCII text, preceded and followed by MIME content identifier lines.

                                                                                The format of the symmetric keys file, ordinarily named -ntp.keys, +ntp.keys, is somewhat different than the other files in the interest of backward compatibility. Ordinarily, the file is generated by this program, but it can be constructed and edited using an ordinary text editor. @@ -1233,31 +1203,31 @@ and edited using an ordinary text editor. 19 RIPEMD160 77ca332cafb30e3cafb174dcd5b80ded7ba9b3d2 # RIPEMD160 key 20 AES128CMAC f92ff73eee86c1e7dc638d6489a04e4e555af878 # AES128CMAC key

-
Figure 1. Typical Symmetric Key File
+
Figure 1. Typical Symmetric Key File
 

Figure 1 shows a typical symmetric keys file used by the reference implementation. Following the header the keys are entered one per line in the format

-
keyno type key
+
keyno type key
 

where -keyno +keyno is a positive integer in the range 1-65535; -type +type is the key type for the message digest algorithm, which in the absence of the OpenSSL library must be -MD5 +MD5 to designate the MD5 message digest algorithm; if the OpenSSL library is installed, the key type can be any message digest algorithm supported by that library; however, if compatibility with FIPS 140-2 is required, the key type must be either -SHA +SHA or -SHA1; -key +SHA1; +key is the key itself, which is a printable ASCII string 20 characters or less in length: each character is chosen from the 93 printable characters @@ -1274,113 +1244,64 @@ An OpenSSL key consists of a hex-encoded ASCII string of 40 characters, which is truncated as necessary.

Note that the keys used by the -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) programs are checked against passwords requested by the programs and entered by hand, so it is generally appropriate to specify these keys in human readable ASCII format.

The -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen program generates a symmetric keys file -ntpkey_MD5key_hostname. filestamp. +ntpkey_MD5key_hostname. filestamp. Since the file contains private shared keys, it should be visible only to root and distributed by secure means to other subnet hosts. The NTP daemon loads the file -ntp.keys, +ntp.keys, so -ntp-keygen +ntp-keygen installs a soft link from this name to the generated file. Subsequently, similar soft links must be installed by manual or automated means on the other subnet hosts. While this file is not used with the Autokey Version 2 protocol, it is needed to authenticate some remote configuration commands used by the -ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) +ntpq(1ntpqmdoc) and -ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) +ntpdc(1ntpdcmdoc) utilities.

-

This section was generated by AutoGen, -using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntp-keygen program. +

This section was generated by AutoGen, +using the agtexi-cmd template and the option descriptions for the ntp-keygen program. This software is released under the NTP license, <http://ntp.org/license>.

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
+
+ +
+ -

1.2.2 ntp-keygen help/usage (--help)

- +

1.2.2 ntp-keygen help/usage (--help)

+

This is the automatically generated usage text for ntp-keygen.

-

The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option -(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print +

The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option +(--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. -more-help is disabled on platforms without a working -fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is -used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit +more-help is disabled on platforms without a working +fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is +used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

-
ntp-keygen (ntp) - Create a NTP host key - Ver. 4.2.8p17
+
ntp-keygen (ntp) - Create a NTP host key - Ver. 4.2.8p17
 Usage:  ntp-keygen [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]...
   Flg Arg Option-Name    Description
    -b Num imbits         identity modulus bits
@@ -1431,36 +1352,40 @@ Please send bug reports to:  <https://bugs.ntp.org, bugs@ntp.org>
 

-
+
+
+ -

1.2.3 imbits option (-b)

- +

1.2.3 imbits option (-b)

+

This is the “identity modulus bits” option. -This option takes a number argument imbits. +This option takes a number argument imbits.

This option has some usage constraints. It: -

    -
  • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

      +
    • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

    The number of bits in the identity modulus. The default is 512.


    -
    +
    +
    + -

    1.2.4 certificate option (-c)

    - +

    1.2.4 certificate option (-c)

    +

    This is the “certificate scheme” option. -This option takes a string argument scheme. +This option takes a string argument scheme.

    This option has some usage constraints. It: -

      -
    • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

        +
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

      scheme is one of @@ -1472,193 +1397,215 @@ Note that RSA schemes must be used with a RSA sign key and DSA schemes must be used with a DSA sign key. The default without this option is RSA-MD5.


      -
      +
      +
      + -

      1.2.5 cipher option (-C)

      - +

      1.2.5 cipher option (-C)

      +

      This is the “privatekey cipher” option. -This option takes a string argument cipher. +This option takes a string argument cipher.

      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

        -
      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

          +
        • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

        Select the cipher which is used to encrypt the files containing private keys. The default is three-key triple DES in CBC mode, -equivalent to "-C des-ede3-cbc". The openssl tool lists ciphers -available in "openssl -h" output. +equivalent to "-C des-ede3-cbc". The openssl tool lists ciphers +available in "openssl -h" output.


        -
        +
        +
        + -

        1.2.6 id-key option (-e)

        - +

        1.2.6 id-key option (-e)

        +

        This is the “write iff or gq identity keys” option.

        This option has some usage constraints. It: -

          -
        • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

            +
          • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

          Write the public parameters from the IFF or GQ client keys to the standard output. This is intended for automatic key distribution by email.


          -
          +
          +
          + -

          1.2.7 gq-params option (-G)

          - +

          1.2.7 gq-params option (-G)

          +

          This is the “generate gq parameters and keys” option.

          This option has some usage constraints. It: -

            -
          • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

              +
            • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

            Generate parameters and keys for the GQ identification scheme, obsoleting any that may exist.


            -
            +
            +
            + -

            1.2.8 host-key option (-H)

            - +

            1.2.8 host-key option (-H)

            +

            This is the “generate rsa host key” option.

            This option has some usage constraints. It: -

              -
            • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

                +
              • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

              Generate new host keys, obsoleting any that may exist.


              -
              +
              +
              + -

              1.2.9 iffkey option (-I)

              - +

              1.2.9 iffkey option (-I)

              +

              This is the “generate iff parameters” option.

              This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                -
              • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

                  +
                • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

                Generate parameters for the IFF identification scheme, obsoleting any that may exist.


                -
                +
                +
                + -

                1.2.10 ident option (-i)

                - +

                1.2.10 ident option (-i)

                +

                This is the “set autokey group name” option. -This option takes a string argument group. +This option takes a string argument group.

                This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                  -
                • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

                    +
                  • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

                  Set the optional Autokey group name to name. This is used in the file name of IFF, GQ, and MV client parameters files. In that role, the default is the host name if this option is not -provided. The group name, if specified using -i/--ident or -using -s/--subject-name following an ’@’ character, +provided. The group name, if specified using -i/--ident or +using -s/--subject-name following an ’@’ character, is also a part of the self-signed host certificate subject and -issuer names in the form host@group and should match the -’crypto ident’ or ’server ident’ configuration in the -ntpd configuration file. +issuer names in the form host@group and should match the +’crypto ident’ or ’server ident’ configuration in the +ntpd configuration file.


                  -
                  +
                  +
                  + -

                  1.2.11 lifetime option (-l)

                  - +

                  1.2.11 lifetime option (-l)

                  +

                  This is the “set certificate lifetime” option. -This option takes a number argument lifetime. +This option takes a number argument lifetime.

                  This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                    -
                  • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

                      +
                    • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

                    Set the certificate expiration to lifetime days from now.


                    -
                    +
                    +
                    + -

                    1.2.12 modulus option (-m)

                    - +

                    1.2.12 modulus option (-m)

                    +

                    This is the “prime modulus” option. -This option takes a number argument modulus. +This option takes a number argument modulus.

                    This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                      -
                    • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

                        +
                      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

                      The number of bits in the prime modulus. The default is 512.


                      -
                      +
                      +
                      + -

                      1.2.13 md5key option (-M)

                      - +

                      1.2.13 md5key option (-M)

                      +

                      This is the “generate symmetric keys” option. Generate symmetric keys, obsoleting any that may exist.


                      -
                      +
                      +
                      + -

                      1.2.14 pvt-cert option (-P)

                      - +

                      1.2.14 pvt-cert option (-P)

                      +

                      This is the “generate pc private certificate” option.

                      This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                        -
                      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

                          +
                        • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

                        Generate a private certificate. By default, the program generates public certificates.


                        -
                        +
                        +
                        + -

                        1.2.15 password option (-p)

                        - +

                        1.2.15 password option (-p)

                        +

                        This is the “local private password” option. -This option takes a string argument passwd. +This option takes a string argument passwd.

                        This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                          -
                        • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

                            +
                          • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

                          Local files containing private data are encrypted with the @@ -1667,19 +1614,21 @@ must be specified to the local ntpd via the "crypto pw password" configuration command. The default password is the local hostname.


                          -
                          +
                          +
                          + -

                          1.2.16 export-passwd option (-q)

                          - +

                          1.2.16 export-passwd option (-q)

                          +

                          This is the “export iff or gq group keys with password” option. -This option takes a string argument passwd. +This option takes a string argument passwd.

                          This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                            -
                          • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

                              +
                            • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

                            Export IFF or GQ identity group keys to the standard output, @@ -1688,128 +1637,140 @@ The same password must be specified to the remote ntpd via the "crypto pw password" configuration command. See also the option –id-key (-e) for unencrypted exports.


                            -
                            +
                            +
                            + -

                            1.2.17 subject-name option (-s)

                            - +

                            1.2.17 subject-name option (-s)

                            +

                            This is the “set host and optionally group name” option. -This option takes a string argument host@group. +This option takes a string argument host@group.

                            This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                              -
                            • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

                                +
                              • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

                              Set the Autokey host name, and optionally, group name specified -following an ’@’ character. The host name is used in the file +following an ’@’ character. The host name is used in the file name of generated host and signing certificates, without the group name. The host name, and if provided, group name are used -in host@group form for the host certificate subject and issuer -fields. Specifying ’-s @group’ is allowed, and results in -leaving the host name unchanged while appending @group to the -subject and issuer fields, as with -i group. The group name, or +in host@group form for the host certificate subject and issuer +fields. Specifying ’-s @group’ is allowed, and results in +leaving the host name unchanged while appending @group to the +subject and issuer fields, as with -i group. The group name, or if not provided, the host name are also used in the file names of IFF, GQ, and MV client parameter files.


                              -
                              +
                              +
                              + -

                              1.2.18 sign-key option (-S)

                              - +

                              1.2.18 sign-key option (-S)

                              +

                              This is the “generate sign key (rsa or dsa)” option. -This option takes a string argument sign. +This option takes a string argument sign.

                              This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                -
                              • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

                                  +
                                • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

                                Generate a new sign key of the designated type, obsoleting any that may exist. By default, the program uses the host key as the sign key.


                                -
                                +
                                +
                                + -

                                1.2.19 trusted-cert option (-T)

                                - +

                                1.2.19 trusted-cert option (-T)

                                +

                                This is the “trusted certificate (tc scheme)” option.

                                This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                  -
                                • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

                                    +
                                  • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

                                  Generate a trusted certificate. By default, the program generates a non-trusted certificate.


                                  -
                                  +
                                  +
                                  + -

                                  1.2.20 mv-params option (-V)

                                  - +

                                  1.2.20 mv-params option (-V)

                                  +

                                  This is the “generate <num> mv parameters” option. -This option takes a number argument num. +This option takes a number argument num.

                                  This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                    -
                                  • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

                                      +
                                    • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.

                                    Generate parameters and keys for the Mu-Varadharajan (MV) identification scheme.


                                    -
                                    +
                                    +
                                    + -

                                    1.2.21 mv-keys option (-v)

                                    - +

                                    1.2.21 mv-keys option (-v)

                                    +

                                    This is the “update <num> mv keys” option. -This option takes a number argument num. +This option takes a number argument num.

                                    This option has some usage constraints. It: -

                                      -
                                    • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation. +

                                        +
                                      • must be compiled in by defining AUTOKEY during the compilation.
                                      -

                                      This option has no ‘doc’ documentation. +

                                      This option has no ‘doc’ documentation.


                                      -
                                      +
                                      +
                                      + -

                                      1.2.22 presetting/configuring ntp-keygen

                                      +

                                      1.2.22 presetting/configuring ntp-keygen

                                      -

                                      Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by -loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named NTP-KEYGEN and NTP-KEYGEN_<OPTION_NAME>. <OPTION_NAME> must be one of +

                                      Any option that is not marked as not presettable may be preset by +loading values from configuration ("rc" or "ini") files, and values from environment variables named NTP-KEYGEN and NTP-KEYGEN_<OPTION_NAME>. <OPTION_NAME> must be one of the options listed above in upper case and segmented with underscores. -The NTP-KEYGEN variable will be tokenized and parsed like +The NTP-KEYGEN variable will be tokenized and parsed like the command line. The remaining variables are tested for existence and their values are treated like option arguments.

                                      -

                                      libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files: -

                                        -
                                      • $HOME -
                                      • $PWD +

                                        libopts will search in 2 places for configuration files: +

                                          +
                                        • $HOME +
                                        • $PWD
                                        -

                                        The environment variables HOME, and PWD -are expanded and replaced when ntp-keygen runs. +

                                        The environment variables HOME, and PWD +are expanded and replaced when ntp-keygen runs. For any of these that are plain files, they are simply processed. -For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for +For any that are directories, then a file named .ntprc is searched for within that directory and processed.

                                        Configuration files may be in a wide variety of formats. @@ -1822,98 +1783,109 @@ lines by escaping the newline with a backslash. Common options are collected at the top, followed by program specific segments. The segments are separated by lines like:

                                        -
                                        [NTP-KEYGEN]
                                        +
                                        [NTP-KEYGEN]
                                         

                                        or by

                                        -
                                        <?program ntp-keygen>
                                        +
                                        <?program ntp-keygen>
                                         

                                        Do not mix these styles within one configuration file.

                                        Compound values and carefully constructed string values may also be specified using XML syntax:

                                        -
                                        <option-name>
                                        +
                                        <option-name>
                                            <sub-opt>...&lt;...&gt;...</sub-opt>
                                         </option-name>
                                         
                                        -

                                        yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of +

                                        yielding an option-name.sub-opt string value of

                                        -
                                        "...<...>..."
                                        +
                                        "...<...>..."
                                         
                                        -

                                        AutoOpts does not track suboptions. You simply note that it is a -hierarchicly valued option. AutoOpts does provide a means for searching +

                                        AutoOpts does not track suboptions. You simply note that it is a +hierarchicly valued option. AutoOpts does provide a means for searching the associated name/value pair list (see: optionFindValue).

                                        The command line options relating to configuration and/or usage help are:

                                        -

                                        version (-)

                                        +

                                        version (-)

                                        Print the program version to standard out, optionally with licensing information, then exit 0. The optional argument specifies how much licensing detail to provide. The default is to print just the version. The licensing information may be selected with an option argument. Only the first letter of the argument is examined:

                                        -
                                        -
                                        version
                                        +
                                        +
                                        version

                                        Only print the version. This is the default.

                                        -
                                        copyright
                                        +
                                        copyright

                                        Name the copyright usage licensing terms.

                                        -
                                        verbose
                                        +
                                        verbose

                                        Print the full copyright usage licensing terms.


                                        -
                                        +
                                        +
                                        + -

                                        1.2.23 ntp-keygen exit status

                                        +

                                        1.2.23 ntp-keygen exit status

                                        One of the following exit values will be returned: -

                                        -
                                        0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)
                                        +

                                        +
                                        0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

                                        Successful program execution.

                                        -
                                        1 (EXIT_FAILURE)
                                        +
                                        1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

                                        The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

                                        -
                                        66 (EX_NOINPUT)
                                        +
                                        66 (EX_NOINPUT)

                                        A specified configuration file could not be loaded.

                                        -
                                        70 (EX_SOFTWARE)
                                        +
                                        70 (EX_SOFTWARE)

                                        libopts had an internal operational error. Please report it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you.


                                        -
                                        +
                                        +
                                        + -

                                        1.2.24 ntp-keygen Usage

                                        +

                                        1.2.24 ntp-keygen Usage


                                        -
                                        +
                                        +
                                        + -

                                        1.2.25 ntp-keygen Notes

                                        +

                                        1.2.25 ntp-keygen Notes


                                        -
                                        +
                                        +
                                        + -

                                        1.2.26 ntp-keygen Bugs

                                        +

                                        1.2.26 ntp-keygen Bugs


                                        -
                                        +
                                        +
                                        +
                                        + -

                                        1.3 Random Seed File

                                        +

                                        1.3 Random Seed File

                                        All cryptographically sound key generation schemes must have means to randomize the entropy seed used to initialize the internal @@ -1921,32 +1893,34 @@ pseudo-random number generator used by the OpenSSL library routines. If a site supports ssh, it is very likely that means to do this are already available. The entropy seed used by the OpenSSL library is contained in a file, -usually called .rnd, which must be available when -starting the ntp-keygen program or ntpd daemon. +usually called .rnd, which must be available when +starting the ntp-keygen program or ntpd daemon.

                                        The OpenSSL library looks for the file using the path specified by the -RANDFILE environment variable in the user home directory, whether root +RANDFILE environment variable in the user home directory, whether root or some other user. -If the RANDFILE environment variable is not -present, the library looks for the .rnd file in the user home +If the RANDFILE environment variable is not +present, the library looks for the .rnd file in the user home directory. -Since both the ntp-keygen program and ntpd daemon must run -as root, the logical place to put this file is in /.rnd or -/root/.rnd. +Since both the ntp-keygen program and ntpd daemon must run +as root, the logical place to put this file is in /.rnd or +/root/.rnd. If the file is not available or cannot be written, the program exits with a message to the system log.


                                        -
                                        +
                                        +
                                        + -

                                        1.4 Cryptographic Data Files

                                        +

                                        1.4 Cryptographic Data Files

                                        -

                                        File and link names are in the form ntpkey_key_name.fstamp, -where key is the key or parameter type, -name is the host or group name and -fstamp is the filestamp (NTP seconds) when the file was created). +

                                        File and link names are in the form ntpkey_key_name.fstamp, +where key is the key or parameter type, +name is the host or group name and +fstamp is the filestamp (NTP seconds) when the file was created). By convention, key names in generated file names include both upper and lower case characters, while key names in generated link names include only lower case characters. The filestamp is not used in generated link @@ -1961,23 +1935,23 @@ server files for responses have a key subtype, as in the GQ response GQkey.

                                        All files begin with two nonencrypted lines. The first line contains -the file name in the format ntpkey_key_host.fstamp. +the file name in the format ntpkey_key_host.fstamp. The second line contains the datestamp in conventional Unix date format. -Lines beginning with # are ignored. +Lines beginning with # are ignored.

                                        The remainder of the file contains cryptographic data encoded first using ASN.1 rules, then encrypted using the DES-CBC algorithm with given password and finally written in PEM-encoded printable ASCII text preceded and followed by MIME content identifier lines.

                                        -

                                        The format of the symmetric keys file, ordinarily named ntp.keys, +

                                        The format of the symmetric keys file, ordinarily named ntp.keys, is somewhat different than the other files in the interest of backward compatibility. Ordinarily, the file is generated by this program, but it can be constructed and edited using an ordinary text editor.

                                        -
                                        # ntpkey_MD5key_hms.local.3564038757
                                        +
                                        # ntpkey_MD5key_hms.local.3564038757
                                         # Sun Dec  9 02:45:57 2012
                                         
                                          1 MD5 "]!ghT%O;3)WJ,/Nc:>I  # MD5 key
                                        @@ -2026,26 +2000,28 @@ An OpenSSL
                                         key consists of a hex-encoded ASCII string of 40 characters, which is
                                         truncated as necessary.
                                         

                                        -

                                        Note that the keys used by the ntpq and ntpdc programs are +

                                        Note that the keys used by the ntpq and ntpdc programs are checked against passwords requested by the programs and entered by hand, so it is generally appropriate to specify these keys in human readable ASCII format.

                                        -

                                        The ntp-keygen program generates a MD5 symmetric keys file -ntpkey_MD5key_hostname.filestamp. +

                                        The ntp-keygen program generates a MD5 symmetric keys file +ntpkey_MD5key_hostname.filestamp. Since the file contains private shared keys, it should be visible only to root and distributed by secure means to other subnet hosts. -The NTP daemon loads the file ntp.keys, so ntp-keygen +The NTP daemon loads the file ntp.keys, so ntp-keygen installs a soft link from this name to the generated file. Subsequently, similar soft links must be installed by manual or automated means on the other subnet hosts. While this file is not used with the Autokey Version 2 protocol, it is needed to -authenticate some remote configuration commands used by the ntpq and -ntpdc utilities. -


                                        +authenticate some remote configuration commands used by the ntpq and +ntpdc utilities. +

                                        +
                                        +
                                        diff --git a/util/ntp-keygen.man.in b/util/ntp-keygen.man.in index 149553015..57d182980 100644 --- a/util/ntp-keygen.man.in +++ b/util/ntp-keygen.man.in @@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ .ds B-Font B .ds I-Font I .ds R-Font R -.TH ntp-keygen @NTP_KEYGEN_MS@ "06 Jun 2023" "ntp (4.2.8p17)" "User Commands" +.TH ntp-keygen @NTP_KEYGEN_MS@ "07 Jan 2024" "ntp (4.2.8p17)" "User Commands" .\" .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (in-mem file) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:32 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:35:09 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntp-keygen-opts.def .\" and the template file agman-cmd.tpl .SH NAME @@ -1351,7 +1351,7 @@ it to autogen-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .SH "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .SH "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .SH BUGS It can take quite a while to generate some cryptographic values. diff --git a/util/ntp-keygen.mdoc.in b/util/ntp-keygen.mdoc.in index 44b1954cc..524849db6 100644 --- a/util/ntp-keygen.mdoc.in +++ b/util/ntp-keygen.mdoc.in @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -.Dd June 6 2023 +.Dd January 7 2024 .Dt NTP_KEYGEN @NTP_KEYGEN_MS@ User Commands .Os .\" EDIT THIS FILE WITH CAUTION (ntp-keygen-opts.mdoc) .\" -.\" It has been AutoGen-ed June 6, 2023 at 04:38:27 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 +.\" It has been AutoGen-ed January 7, 2024 at 12:35:05 AM by AutoGen 5.18.16 .\" From the definitions ntp-keygen-opts.def .\" and the template file agmdoc-cmd.tpl .Sh NAME @@ -1208,7 +1208,7 @@ it to autogen\-users@lists.sourceforge.net. Thank you. .Sh "AUTHORS" The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation .Sh "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 1992\-2023 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. +Copyright (C) 1992\-2024 The University of Delaware and Network Time Foundation all rights reserved. This program is released under the terms of the NTP license, . .Sh BUGS It can take quite a while to generate some cryptographic values.